August 1999

P/N 76-100016-001

PEGAsys

Intelligent Suppression-Control
and Fire-Alarm System

Installation, Operation,
and Maintenance Manual
UL Listing File No. S2422
Factory Mutual Approval J.I. No. OB2A6.AY

LISTED

Fire Systems
 PEGAsys
Intelligent Suppression-Control
and Fire-Alarm System

Installation, Operation,
And Maintenance Manual

Document No. PEGAsys

August 1999
 This Manual Is To Be Used By Trained Distributors Only

FOREWORD

This manual is intended to clearly and accurately reflect the PEGAsys Fire Alarm/Suppression Control System. This publication de-
scribes the operation, installation and maintenance of the PEGAsys Fire Alarm/Suppression Control System, P/Ns 76-100000-501 for
Single-Loop System and 76-100000-600 for Multi-Loop System.

TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS

ADA Americans with Disabilities Act NO Normally Open
AI Addressable Contact Input Device NR Not Registered
AO Addressable Relay Output Device NYC New York City
BPM Beats Per Minute P/N Part Number
CCM Central Control Module PAS Positive Alarm Sequence
CCP Central Control Panel PC Personnel Computer
EDP Electronic Data Processing PCS PEGAsys Configuration Software
EOC Event Output Control PC Line Power/Communication Line (RX/TX Loop)
FCP Fire Control Panel PS Power Supply
GUI Graphical User Interface RCU Remote Control Unit
I/O Input/Output RTC Real Time Clock
ID Identification RX/TX Receive Transmit
IRI Industrial Risk Insurers UL Underwriter Laboratories
NC Normally Closed VDC Voltage Direct Current

ACCEPTANCES, APPROVALS, AND CERTIFICATIONS

PEGAsys Single-Loop System (P/N 76-100000-501)

UL: Underwriters Laboratories Listing File Number S2422.
FM: Factory Mutual Engineering Corp. (Factory Mutual System) Approval J.I. Number 3005511
CSFM: Pending.
NYC: Pending.

PEGAsys Multi-Loop System (P/N 76-100000-600)

UL: Underwriters Laboratories Listing File Number S2422.
FM: Factory Mutual Engineering Corp. (Factory Mutual System) Approval J.I. Number 3005511
CSFM: Pending.
NYC: Pending.

i
(THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK)

ii
 TABLE OF CONTENTS
Forward ......................................................................................................................................................... i
Terms and Abbreviations ................................................................................................................................ i
Appendices ................................................................................................................................................... vi
List of Illustrations .......................................................................................................................................... vii
List of Tables ................................................................................................................................................. ix
Safety Summary ............................................................................................................................................ x

PARAGRAPH TITLE PAGE

1 GENERAL INFORMATION ................................................................................................................................................ 1-1

1-1 Introduction ..................................................................................................................................................................... 1-1
1-1.1 System Description ........................................................................................................................................................ 1-1
1-1.2 System Components ..................................................................................................................................................... 1-1
1-2 Component Description ................................................................................................................................................. 1-1
1-2.1 Central Control Module (CCM) ....................................................................................................................................... 1-1
1-2.2 Display Module ............................................................................................................................................................... 1-1
1-2.3 Receiver/Transmitter Module (RX/TX) ............................................................................................................................ 1-2
1-2.4 Power Supply/Charger Assembly .................................................................................................................................. 1-2
1-2.5 Basic Motherboard ......................................................................................................................................................... 1-2
1-2.6 Multi-Loop Motherboard ................................................................................................................................................. 1-3
1-2.7 Input/Output Modules ..................................................................................................................................................... 1-3
1-2.7.1 Signal Output Module ..................................................................................................................................................... 1-3
1-2.7.2 Relay Output Module ...................................................................................................................................................... 1-3
1-2.7.3 Agent Release Output Module ....................................................................................................................................... 1-4
1-2.7.4 City Tie Module ............................................................................................................................................................... 1-4
1-2.8 Standby Batteries ............................................................................................................................................................ 1-4
1-2.9 Intelligent Loop Devices ................................................................................................................................................. 1-4
1-2.9.1 SmartOneTM Ionization Detectors ................................................................................................................................... 1-4
1-2.9.2 SmartOne Photoelectric Detectors ................................................................................................................................ 1-5
1-2.9.3 SmartOne Heat Detectors ............................................................................................................................................. 1-5
1-2.10 SmartOne Detector Bases ............................................................................................................................................ 1-5
1-2.11 Addressable Contact Input Devices .............................................................................................................................. 1-5
1-2.12 Addressable Relay Output Devices ............................................................................................................................... 1-5
1-2.13 Model DH-2000 Air Duct Housing .................................................................................................................................. 1-5
1-2.14 Loop Isolator Devices .................................................................................................................................................... 1-6
1-3 System Specification ...................................................................................................................................................... 1-6

2 OPERATION .................................................................................................................................................................... 2-1

2-1 Introduction ..................................................................................................................................................................... 2-1
2-1.1 Mode of Operation .......................................................................................................................................................... 2-1
2-2 Control and Indicators .................................................................................................................................................... 2-1
2-2.1 LCD Display ................................................................................................................................................................... 2-1
2-2.2 Audible Device ................................................................................................................................................................ 2-2
2-2.3 Control and Indicator Description .................................................................................................................................. 2-2
2-3 System Security .............................................................................................................................................................. 2-2
2-3.1 Levels of Security ............................................................................................................................................................ 2-2
2-3.2 Default Passwords ......................................................................................................................................................... 2-2
2-3.3 Entering Passwords ...................................................................................................................................................... 2-2
2-4 System Power-Up .......................................................................................................................................................... 2-2
2-5 System Menus ................................................................................................................................................................ 2-4
2-5.1 Menu Structure ................................................................................................................................................................ 2-4
2-5.2 Accessing the System Menus ........................................................................................................................................ 2-4
2-5.3 Exiting the System Menus .............................................................................................................................................. 2-4
2-5.4 Menu Functions .............................................................................................................................................................. 2-4
2-5.4.1 Isolate Menu Function .................................................................................................................................................... 2-4
2-5.4.2 List Menu Function ......................................................................................................................................................... 2-4
2-5.4.3 Set Menu Function .......................................................................................................................................................... 2-4
2-5.4.4 Test Menu Function ........................................................................................................................................................ 2-4
2-6 Modes of Operation ........................................................................................................................................................ 2-5
2-6.1 Normal Standby Mode .................................................................................................................................................... 2-5
2-6.2 Active Alarm Mode ........................................................................................................................................................... 2-5
2-6.2.1 Alarm Mode Indications .................................................................................................................................................. 2-5
2-6.2.2 Alarm Mode User Action ................................................................................................................................................. 2-5

iii
 TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONT.)
PARAGRAPH TITLE PAGE

2-6.3 Active Supervisory Trouble Mode ................................................................................................................................. 2-10

2-6.3.1 Supervisory Trouble Mode Indication ........................................................................................................................... 2-10
2-6.3.2 Supervisory Trouble Mode User Action ........................................................................................................................ 2-10
2-6.4 Active Trouble Mode ...................................................................................................................................................... 2-11
2-6.4.1 Trouble Mode Indications .............................................................................................................................................. 2-11
2-6.4.2 Trouble Mode User Action ............................................................................................................................................. 2-11
2-7 Printing Operation ......................................................................................................................................................... 2-11
2-8 System Programming ................................................................................................................................................... 2-11
2-8.1 EOC Programming ........................................................................................................................................................ 2-11
2-8.1.1 Listing EOC Programming ........................................................................................................................................... 2-12
2-8.2 RTC Programming ....................................................................................................................................................... 2-12
2-8.2.1 Listing RTC Programming ........................................................................................................................................... 2-12
2-8.2.2 Enable/Disable RTC Program Line Numbers ............................................................................................................ 2-12
2-8.3 Types of Inputs and Outputs ........................................................................................................................................ 2-12
2-8.3.1 System Inputs ............................................................................................................................................................... 2-12
2-8.3.2 Remote Control Unit (RCU) ......................................................................................................................................... 2-12
2-8.3.3 RX/TX Loops ................................................................................................................................................................. 2-12
2-8.3.4 System Outputs ............................................................................................................................................................ 2-13
2-8.3.5 System I/O Modules ..................................................................................................................................................... 2-13
2-8.4 Addressing I/O Modules ............................................................................................................................................... 2-13
2-8.5 Registering I/O Module Assignments .......................................................................................................................... 2-13
2-8.5.1 Listing I/O Module Assignment .................................................................................................................................... 2-13
2-8.6 Addressing RCUs ....................................................................................................................................................... 2-13
2-8.7 Registering RCUs ....................................................................................................................................................... 2-14
2-8.7.1 Detector Registration ................................................................................................................................................... 2-14
2-8.7.2 Addressable Contact Monitor Registration .................................................................................................................. 2-14
2-8.7.3 Remote Relay Registration .......................................................................................................................................... 2-15
2-8.7.4 Listing all Registered RCUs ....................................................................................................................................... 2-15
2-8.7.5 Un-registering RCUs .................................................................................................................................................. 2-15

3 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION .......................................................................................................................................... 3-1

3-1 Introduction ..................................................................................................................................................................... 3-1
3-2 Overall Block Diagram Description ................................................................................................................................ 3-1
3-3 Functional Descriptions ................................................................................................................................................. 3-2
3-3.1 Central Control Module .................................................................................................................................................. 3-2
3-3.2 Receiver/Transmitter (RX/TX) Module ............................................................................................................................ 3-3
3-3.3 Power Supply/Charger Assembly, Revision A ................................................................................................................ 3-4
3-3.4 Power Supply/Charger Assembly, Revision C ............................................................................................................... 3-5
3-3.5 Multi-Loop I/O Motherboard ............................................................................................................................................ 3-6
3-3.6 Signal Output Module ..................................................................................................................................................... 3-7
3-3.7 Relay Output Module ...................................................................................................................................................... 3-8
3-3.8 Agent Release Module ................................................................................................................................................... 3-9
3-3.9 City Tie Module ............................................................................................................................................................. 3-10
3-3.10 Field Devices ................................................................................................................................................................. 3-11
3-3.11 SmartOne Ionization Detectors .................................................................................................................................... 3-11
3-3.12 SmartOne Photoelectric Detectors ............................................................................................................................... 3-11
3-3.13 SmartOne Heat Detectors ............................................................................................................................................ 3-11
3-3.14 Addressable Contact Input Devices ............................................................................................................................. 3-11
3-3.15 Addressable Relay Output Devices ............................................................................................................................. 3-12
3-3.16 Model DH-2000 Air Duct Housing ................................................................................................................................ 3-12
3-3.17 Loop Isolator Devices .................................................................................................................................................. 3-12

4 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE ......................................................................................................................................... 4-1

4-1 Introduction ..................................................................................................................................................................... 4-1
4-2 Scheduled Maintenance ................................................................................................................................................ 4-1
4-3 Maintenance Procedures ............................................................................................................................................... 4-1
4-3.1 Lamp Test ....................................................................................................................................................................... 4-1
4-3.2 Loop Device Test ............................................................................................................................................................ 4-1
4-3.3 Battery Test ..................................................................................................................................................................... 4-1
4-3.4 Walk Test ........................................................................................................................................................................ 4-2

iv
 TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONT.)
PARAGRAPH TITLE PAGE

4-3.4.1 Walk Testing Detectors .................................................................................................................................................. 4-2

4-3.4.2 Walk Test Procedure ...................................................................................................................................................... 4-2
4-3.5 Alarm Simulation Test (AST) .......................................................................................................................................... 4-2
4-3.5.1 AST Procedure ............................................................................................................................................................... 4-3
4-4 Disarming and Rearming Release Circuits .................................................................................................................. 4-3
4-4.1 Disarming Release Circuits .......................................................................................................................................... 4-3
4-4.2 Arming Release Circuits ................................................................................................................................................ 4-3
4-5 Power-Down System ...................................................................................................................................................... 4-3
4-5.1 Power-Down Procedure ................................................................................................................................................. 4-3
4-6 Power-Up System .......................................................................................................................................................... 4-4
4-6.1 Power-Up Procedure ...................................................................................................................................................... 4-4

5 TROUBLESHOOTING AND CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE ............................................................................................. 5-1

5-1 Introduction ..................................................................................................................................................................... 5-1
5-2 Standard Fault Isolation Techniques ............................................................................................................................. 5-1
5-2.1 Visual Inspection ............................................................................................................................................................ 5-1
5-2.2 Power Checks ................................................................................................................................................................ 5-1
5-3 Troubleshooting ............................................................................................................................................................. 5-1
5-4 Removal and Replacement ........................................................................................................................................... 5-2
5-4.1 Required Tools ............................................................................................................................................................... 5-2
5-4.2 Central Control Module .................................................................................................................................................. 5-2
5-4.3 RX/TX Module ................................................................................................................................................................. 5-2
5-4.4 Field Devices .................................................................................................................................................................. 5-3

6 PARTS LIST .................................................................................................................................................................... 6-1

6-1 Introduction ..................................................................................................................................................................... 6-1

7 INSTALLATION ................................................................................................................................................................ 7-1

7-1 Introduction ..................................................................................................................................................................... 7-1
7-2 Materials Required For Installation ................................................................................................................................ 7-1
7-3 Installation Procedure For Central Control Panel ......................................................................................................... 7-1
7-4 Installation Procedure For Expansion Enclosures ........................................................................................................ 7-1
7-5 Installation Procedure For I/O Motherboard ................................................................................................................... 7-2
7-6 Installation Procedure For Rx/Tx Module (Multi-Loop Only) ........................................................................................... 7-2
7-7 Installation of I/O Modules .............................................................................................................................................. 7-3
7-7.1 Signal Audible Output Module ........................................................................................................................................ 7-3
7-7.2 Relay Output Module ...................................................................................................................................................... 7-4
7-7.3 Agent Release Module ................................................................................................................................................... 7-4
7-7.4 City-Tie Output Module ................................................................................................................................................... 7-4
7-7.6 Power Supply/Charger Assembly .................................................................................................................................. 7-4
7-7.7 Power Supply/Charger Assembly, Expansion Enclosure .............................................................................................. 7-4
7-7.8. Power Supply Communication Connections ................................................................................................................ 7-6
7-8 Connecting AC Power .................................................................................................................................................... 7-6
7-9 Install And Connect DC Power ....................................................................................................................................... 7-6
7-9.1 Battery Enclosure ........................................................................................................................................................... 7-6
7-9.2 Batteries ......................................................................................................................................................................... 7-6
7-10 Field Device Connection To RX/TX Module .................................................................................................................... 7-7
7-10.1 Wiring the RX/TX PC Line ............................................................................................................................................... 7-7
7-11 Output Signal Connection .............................................................................................................................................. 7-9
7-12 External Power Failure Indicator Connection .............................................................................................................. 7-10
7-13 Detector Installation ..................................................................................................................................................... 7-10
7-14 Setting and Adjusting Smoke & Heat Detector Sensitivities ........................................................................................ 7-10
7-14.1 Setting and Adjusting Smoke and Heat Detector Sensitivity Procedure ..................................................................... 7-10
7-15 Addressable Contact Input Device Installation ............................................................................................................. 7-11
7-16 Addressable Relay Output Device Installation ............................................................................................................. 7-11
7-17 Installation Checkout ..................................................................................................................................................... 7-11
7-18 Connection of Peripherals ............................................................................................................................................ 7-11
7-18.1 Connecting a Terminal or Personal Computer ............................................................................................................ 7-11
7-18.2 Connecting a Printer ..................................................................................................................................................... 7-11

v
 APPENDICES
APPENDIX TITLE PAGE

A POWER SUPPLY REQUIREMENTS .............................................................................................................................. A-1

B SYSTEM EXPANSION .................................................................................................................................................... B-1

C RELEASING APPLICATIONS ......................................................................................................................................... C-1

D NOT USED .................................................................................................................................................................... D-1

E FACTORY MUTUAL SPRINKLER REQUIREMENTS .................................................................................................... E-1

F GLOSSARY ..................................................................................................................................................................... F-1

G DISPLAY ABBREVIATIONS ............................................................................................................................................ G-1

H INDEX ............................................................................................................................................................................ H-1

I SYSTEM DRAWINGS ...................................................................................................................................................... I-1

J PEGAsys NETWORK INTERFACE CARD ...................................................................................................................... J-1

K ADDRESSABLE SIGNAL/SOUNDER ............................................................................................................................ K-1

L REMOTE DISPLAY CONTROL MODULE AND REMOTE DISPLAY MODULE ............................................................... L-1

M ADDRESSABLE ALARMLINE MODULE ........................................................................................................................ M-1

N NETWORKABLE CENTRAL CONTROL MODULE (NCCM) ......................................................................................... N-1

O CENTRAL STATION OPERATION .................................................................................................................................. O-1

vi
 LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS
FIGURE TITLE PAGE

1-1 PEGAsys System Overall Diagram ................................................................................................................................ 1-0

1-2 Central Control Module (CCM) ....................................................................................................................................... 1-2
1-3 Display Module Assembly .............................................................................................................................................. 1-2
1-4 Receiver/Transmitter Module (RX/TX) ............................................................................................................................ 1-2
1-5 Power Supply/Charger Assembly .................................................................................................................................. 1-2
1-6 Basic I/O Motherboard .................................................................................................................................................... 1-3
1-7 Multi-Loop I/O Motherboard ............................................................................................................................................ 1-3
1-8 Signal Output Module ..................................................................................................................................................... 1-3
1-9 Relay Output Module ...................................................................................................................................................... 1-4
1-10 Agent Release Output Module ....................................................................................................................................... 1-4
1-11 City-Tie Module ............................................................................................................................................................... 1-4
1-12 Battery Enclosure ........................................................................................................................................................... 1-4
1-13 SmartOneTM Detection Device ....................................................................................................................................... 1-4
1-14 4-inch Detector Base ...................................................................................................................................................... 1-5
1-15 6-inch Detector Base ...................................................................................................................................................... 1-5
1-16 Addressable Contact Input Device ................................................................................................................................. 1-5
1-17 Addressable Relay Output Device ................................................................................................................................. 1-5
1-18 Air Duct Housing ............................................................................................................................................................ 1-5
1-19 Loop Isolator, Stand-Alone ............................................................................................................................................. 1-6
1-20 Loop Isolator, RX/TX Mount ............................................................................................................................................ 1-6
1-21 Loop Isolator, 6 Detector Base Mount ........................................................................................................................... 1-6

2-1 System Front Panel ........................................................................................................................................................ 2-1

2-2 Level One Menu Structure .............................................................................................................................................. 2-6
2-3 Level Two Menu Structure ............................................................................................................................................... 2-7

3-1 Overall Block Diagram, Single-Loop System ................................................................................................................ 3-1

3-2 Overall Block Diagram, Multi-Loop System ................................................................................................................... 3-1
3-3 Central Control Module, Details ..................................................................................................................................... 3-2
3-4 Receiver/Transmitter Module, Details ........................................................................................................................... 3-3
3-5 Obsolete Power Supply/Charger Assembly, Revision A, Details .................................................................................. 3-4
3-6 Power Supply/Charger Assembly, Revision C, Details ................................................................................................. 3-5
3-7 Multi-Loop I/O Motherboard, Details .............................................................................................................................. 3-6
3-8 Signal Output Module, Details ....................................................................................................................................... 3-7
3-9 Relay Output Module, Details ......................................................................................................................................... 3-8
3-10 Agent Release Output Module, Details .......................................................................................................................... 3-9
3-11 City Tie Module, Details ................................................................................................................................................ 3-10
3-12 Typical Detector ............................................................................................................................................................. 3-11
3-13 Addressable Contact Input Device ............................................................................................................................... 3-12
3-14 Addressable Relay Output Device ............................................................................................................................... 3-12
3-15 DH-2000 Air Duct Housing ........................................................................................................................................... 3-12
3-16 Loop Isolator, RX/TX Mount .......................................................................................................................................... 3-13
3-17 Loop Isolator, Stand-Alone ........................................................................................................................................... 3-13
3-18 Loop Isolator, 6 Detector Base Mount ......................................................................................................................... 3-13

5-1 Installation for Single Loop ............................................................................................................................................ 5-2

5-2 Installation for Multi-Loop ............................................................................................................................................... 5-2

7-1 CCP Installation Drawing ............................................................................................................................................... 7-1

7-2 Back Plate, I/O Motherboard & 4 P.S. .............................................................................................................................. 7-2
7-3 Back Plate, 8 P.S. ............................................................................................................................................................ 7-2
7-4 Back Plate, 2 I/O Motherboard ........................................................................................................................................ 7-2
7-5 Installation for Multi-Loop ............................................................................................................................................... 7-3
7-6 Power Supply/Charger (Rev A), Wiring Diagram ........................................................................................................... 7-4
7-7 Power Supply/Charger (Rev C), Wiring Diagram .......................................................................................................... 7-5
7-8 Power Supply/Charger (Rev A), Wiring Diagram for Expansion Enclosure .................................................................. 7-5
7-9 Power Supply/Charger (Rev C), Wiring Diagram for Expansion Enclosure ................................................................. 7-5
7-10 Battery Enclosure ........................................................................................................................................................... 7-7
7-11 Conduit to CCP ............................................................................................................................................................... 7-7
7-12 Shielded Wire to CCP .................................................................................................................................................... 7-7
7-13 Style 4, RX/TX PC Line Connections .............................................................................................................................. 7-8

vii
 LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS (CONT.)

FIGURE TITLE PAGE

7-14 Style 6, RX/TX PC Line Connections .............................................................................................................................. 7-8

7-15 Style 6, RX/TX PC Line Connections with Loop Isolators .............................................................................................. 7-9
7-16 Style 7, RX/TX PC Line Connection ................................................................................................................................ 7-9
7-17 CCM Printer Port ........................................................................................................................................................... 7-12

viii
 LIST OF TABLES

TABLES TITLE PAGE

1-1 System Specification ...................................................................................................................................................... 1-6

2-1 Controls and Indicators .................................................................................................................................................. 2-3

2-2 Isolate Menu Function .................................................................................................................................................... 2-8
2-3 List Menu Function ......................................................................................................................................................... 2-8
2-4 Set Menu Function .......................................................................................................................................................... 2-9
2-5 Test Menu Function ...................................................................................................................................................... 2-10

3-1 Multi-Loop I/O Motherboard Connectors ........................................................................................................................ 3-6

3-2 Approved Release Output Devices ................................................................................................................................ 3-9

5-1 Troubleshooting Index ................................................................................................................................................... 5-1

5-2 RX/TX Configuration Selection ....................................................................................................................................... 5-3

6-1 PEGAsys System Parts List ........................................................................................................................................... 6-1

7-1 RX/TX Configuration Selection ....................................................................................................................................... 7-3

7-2 Aux. Power Supply Module Connections to Rev. A ......................................................................................................... 7-5
7-3 Aux. Power Supply Module Connections to Rev. C ........................................................................................................ 7-5

ix
 SAFETY SUMMARY

Installation Precautions Adherence to the following will aid in problem-free installation with long-term reliability:
Warning - Several different sources of power can be connected to this fire alarm control panel. Disconnect all sources of power
before servicing. Control unit and associated equipment may be damaged by removing and/or inserting cards, modules, or intercon-
necting cables while the unit is energized. Do not attempt to install, service, or operate this unit until this manual is read and understood.
CAUTION - System Reacceptance Test after Software Changes: To ensure proper system operation, this product must be tested in
accordance with NFPA - 1996 Chapter 7 after any programming operation or change in site-specific software. Reacceptance testing is
required after any change, addition or deletion of system components, or after any modification, repair or adjustment to system hardware
or wiring.
All components, circuits, system operations, or software functions known to be affected by a change must be 100% tested. In addition,
to ensure that other operations are not inadvertently affected, at least 10% of initiating devices that are not directly affected by the change,
up to a maximum of 50 devices, must also be tested and proper system operation verified.
This system meets NFPA requirements for operation at 0 to 49 C and at a relative humidity of 85% RH (non-condensing) @ 30C.
However, the useful life of the systems standby batteries and the electronic components may be adversely affected by extreme tempera-
ture ranges and humidity. Therefore, it is recommended that this system and its peripherals be installed in an environment with a nominal
room temperature of 60-80F.
Like all solid state electronic devices, this system may operate erratically or can be damaged when subjected to lightning induced
transients. Although no system is completely immune from lightning transients and interference, proper grounding will reduce suscepti-
bility. The use of overhead or outside aerial wiring is not recommended due to the increased susceptibility to nearby lightning
strikes. Consult with the Applications Engineering Department if any problems are anticipated or encountered.
Disconnect AC power and batteries prior to removing or inserting circuit boards. Failure to do so can damage circuits.
Remove all electronic assemblies prior to any drilling, filing, reaming, or punching of the enclosure. When possible, make all cable
entries from the sides. Before making modifications, verify that they will not interfere with battery and printed circuit board location.
Do not over tighten screw terminals, over tightening may damage threads, resulting in reduced terminal contact pressure and difficult
with screw terminal removal.
This system contains static-sensitive components. Always ground yourself with a proper wrist strap before handling any circuits so that
static charges are removed from the body. Use static suppressive packaging to protect electronic assemblies removed from the unit.
Follow the Instructions in the installation, operating, and programming manuals. These instructions must be followed to avoid damage to
the control panel and associated equipment. PEGAsys operation and reliability depend upon proper installation.

Fire Alarm System Limitations While installing a fire alarm system may make lower insurance
rates possible, it is not a substitute for fire insurance!
An automatic fire alarm system - typically made up of smoke detectors, heat detectors, manual pull stations, audible warning devices,
and a fire alarm control with remote notification-capability can provide early warning of a developing fire. Such a system, however, does
not assure protection against property damage or loss of life resulting from a fire.
Any fire alarm system may fail for a variety of reasons:
Smoke detectors may not sense fire where smoke cannot reach the detectors such as in chimneys, in walls, or roofs, or on the other side
of closed doors. Smoke detectors also may not sense a fire on another level or floor of a building. A second floor detector, for example,
may not sense a first floor or basement fire. Furthermore, all types of smoke detectors - both ionization and photoelectric types, have
sensing limitations. No type of smoke detector can sense every kind of fire caused by carelessness and safety hazards like smoking in
bed, violent explosions, escaping gas, improper storage of flammable materials, overloaded electrical circuits, children playing with
matches, or arson.
Audible warning devices such as bells may not alert people if these devices are located on the other side of closed or partly open doors
or are located on another floor of a building.
A fire alarm system will not operate without electrical power. If AC power fails, the system will operate from standby batteries only for a
specified time.
Rate-of-Rise heat detectors may be subject to reduced sensitivity over time. For this reason, the rate-of-rise feature of each detector
should be tested at least once per year by a qualified fire protection specialist.

x
Auxiliary Equipment used in the system may not be technically compatible with the control panel. It is essential to use only equipment
listed for service with your control panel.
Telephone lines needed to transmit alarm signals from a premise to a central monitoring station may be out of service or temporarily
disabled.
The most common cause of fire alarm malfunctions, however, is inadequate maintenance. All devices and system wiring should be
tested and maintained by professional fire alarm installers following written procedures supplied with each device. System inspection
and testing should be scheduled monthly or as required by National and/or local fire codes. Adequate written records of all inspections
should be kept.

GENERAL SAFETY NOTICES The following must be observed to maintain personnel safety.

The following general safety notices supplement specific warnings and cautions appearing in the manual. The safety precautions in this
section must be understood and applied during operation and maintenance. This manual is to be used by trained distributors/technicians.
The entire manual should be read and fully understood prior to installation.
TEST EQUIPMENT
Make certain test equipment is in good operating condition. Do not touch live equipment or personnel working on live equipment while
holding a test meter. Some types of measuring devices should not be grounded; these devices should not be held when taking measure-
ments.
FIRST AID
Any injury, no matter how slight, should never go unattended. Always obtain first aid or medical attention immediately.
GENERAL PRECAUTIONS
The following general safety precautions are to be observed at all times:
1. All electrical components associated with equipment shall be installed and grounded in accordance with NEC, NFPA and local
regulation requirements.
2. Special precautionary measures are essential to prevent applying power to equipment at any time maintenance work is in progress.
3. Before working on electrical equipment, use a voltmeter to ensure that system is not energized.
4. When working near electricity, do not use metal rules, flashlights, metallic pencils, or any other objects having exposed conductive
material.
5. When connecting a meter to terminals for measurement, use range higher than expected voltage.

xi
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System PEGAsys

CHAPTER 1
GENERAL INFORMATION

In multi-loop form the PEGAsys ML panel (P/N 76-100000-600)

1-1 INTRODUCTION consists of a CCM, one power-supply assembly, one RX/TX mod-
ule and one multi-loop motherboard mounted in the enclosure.
This manual contains the operation, maintenance, troubleshoot-
The unique multi-loop motherboard provides the ability to connect
ing, parts listing, and installation information necessary to sup-
up to eight RX/TX modules to the system allowing a full 2040 ad-
port the PEGAsys Intelligent Suppression Control and Fire Alarm
dressable points to be connected to the PEGAsys ML system.
System.
Auxiliary enclosures are available to allow the system to be ex-
NOTE: This manual is to be used by trained distributors only. panded. The auxiliary enclosure has the same dimensions as that
The entire manual should be read and fully understood of the main enclosure with the absence of the window in the door.
prior to installation. There are optional back planes which install in the expansion en-
closure. This allows the number of I/O modules and system power
1-1.1 System Description supplies to be expanded. To allow for maximum system flexibility
PEGAsys is a fire alarm/suppression control system which can expansion enclosure(s) and backplane(s) can be added to the
be used for local, auxiliary, remote protective signaling and re- system. Refer to Appendix B for further system expansion de-
leasing device service. The system is a microprocessor based tails.
design for use with intelligent detectors and loop devices.
The system utilizes distributed intelligent field devices. These
devices are typically smoke detectors, contact input devices 1-2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
relay outputs and signal output modules which represent a single
fire alarm initiation/indicating zone. Each device contains its own The following paragraphs give a brief description of each com-
data transceiver, micro controller, 4k of memory and applicable ponents used in the PEGAsys system. For functional descrip-
algorithms which allows each device to operate independent of tions of each component see Chapter 3 of this manual.
the control system. These unique devices have the ability to
analyze information, make decisions and store information within 1-2.1 Central Control Module (CCM)
themselves. They communicate with the PEGAsys system us-
The CCM assembly is the heart of the system and is comprised
ing the BIP protocol which utilizes a two-wire (Style 4), four wire
of two PCB assemblies, the display module and the main pro-
(Style 6) or isolated (Style 7) multiplex trunk. The PEGAsys can
cessor module. The CCM controls the operation and supervi-
support up to 255 device addresses per loop with a maximum
sion of all the system modules and software within the PEGAsys
of 8 loops for a total of 2040 Intelligent device points per sys-
system. It receives loop device data from the RX/TX module,
tem.
processes the data based on pre-programmed instructions and
The PEGAsys is capable of controlling a wide variety of auxil- transmits output commands to the output modules, field devices,
iary devices, such as relays, audible visual indicating signal and display module(s).
devices and agent/sprinkler release systems. The system also
supports the use of serial printers which provide hard copy of 1-2.2 Display Module
system status information.
The display module assembly, attached to the main processor
1-1.2 System Components PCB, provides the system with the operator interface for control
switches, system status LEDs, system trouble/alarm buzzer, a
The system is comprised of three major components as shown 80-character (2 x 40) LCD display and an integral numeric key-
in Figure 1-1: the Central Control Panel (CCP) communicates pad. The keypad is used for entering the security password and
with the field devices and drives output devices such as alarm navigating through the user menus. The system buzzer pro-
signals that communicate with central stations and various types vides two distinctly different signaling patterns for audible warn-
of control equipment. A display panel located on the CCP pro- ing of system alarms and troubles.
vides system status LEDs, Control Switches and a 80-charac-
ter LCD for alphanumeric display of system status information.
The single-loop PEGAsys Central Control Panel (P/N 76-
100000-501) consists of the Central Control Module (CCM) as-
sembly, one receiver/transmitter (RX/TX) module and one power
supply assembly. Optionally the system can add a motherboard
assembly which allow the installation of optional output mod-
ules. An auxiliary power supply module can be added which
increases the base system power supply capacity to 8.0 amps
at 24 VDC.

76-100016-001 1-1 August 1999

PEGAsys Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System

Battery charging and supervision

AC power supervision
24 VDC supervision
Battery load test
24 VDC ground fault detection (+/-)
Auxiliary 24 VDC outputs

Loop Isolator
for Style 7
Display Reset Switch

Figure 1-4. Receiver/Transmitter Module (RX/TX)

Figure 1-2. Central Control Module (CCM)

System Status

POWER ON ALARM TROUBLE SUPERVISORY

GROUND FAULT PREALARM CPU ERROR SILENCE

ACKLDGE SILENCE RESET 1 2 3 4 5

SCROLL DRILL 6 7 8 9 0

Figure 1-3. Display Module Assembly

1-2.3 Receiver/Transmitter Module (RX/TX)

The RX/TX functions as the hardware & software interface be-
tween the field devices and the CCM. The RX/TX receives con-
trol requests from the CCM and establishes communications
with the field devices. The RX/TX receives status changes from
the field devices and reports these changes to the CCM. The
RX/TX shown in Figure 1-4 is capable of communicating with
up to 255 intelligent devices and complies with the wiring re-
quirements of NFPA Style 4, 6 & 7 (with the use of the loop
isolator device). Style 4 initiation circuit wiring will permit T
Figure 1-5. Power Supply/Charger Assembly
tapping, or branch circuitry.
1-2.5 Basic Motherboard
1-2.4 Power Supply/Charger Assembly
The basic I/O motherboard assembly (P/N 76-100007-001) is
The power supply/charger assembly (P/N 76-100009-010) is
an assembly which can accept up to 8 I/O module circuit board
comprised of a printed circuit board (PCB) assembly and a AC/
assemblies. The motherboard is mounted to the back of the
DC switching power supply unit. The switching power supply
system enclosure and /or the auxiliary enclosures. It distributes
unit provides 4 amps of 24 VDC from the 120/240 VAC input
the system 24 VDC power and I/O bus communications to the I/
power. The PCB assembly is a microprocessor based unit which
O modules. The I/O bus communications are provided by a RJ-
provides the system with:
12 (flat phone cable) style connection. The 24 VDC is provided
by the system power supply via a 2-conductor wiring harness.

August 1999 1-2 76-100016-001

Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
The I/O motherboard mounts to standoffs on the back of the main
and expansion enclosures with screws provided.
PEGAsys
1-2.7.1 SIGNAL OUTPUT MODULE
The PEGAsys panel has the capacity for a maximum of (8) Alarm
Sounder/Signal Output cards, thus providing 32 possible sig-
nal circuits. Each Alarm Sounder/Signal Output card, Figure 1-
8, is equipped with supervised 24 VDC outputs which can
operate as Style Y or Style Z indicating circuits.

Figure 1-6. Basic I/O Motherboard

1-2.6 Multi-Loop Motherboard

The multi-loop I/O motherboard assembly (P/N 76-100017-001)
is an assembly which can accept up to 8 RX/TX modules and

76-100003-001
provide connections for up to 7 I/O module circuit board as-
semblies. The ML motherboard is mounted to standoffs on the
back of the main system enclosure. It distributes system 24
VDC power, CCM-RX/TX communications for up to 8 RX/TX
modules and I/O bus communications to the I/O modules. The
I/O bus communications are provided by a RJ-12 (flat phone
cable) style connection. A single RJ-12 connection connects
the ML motherboard to the CCM for RX/TX communications.
The 24 VDC is provided by the system power supply via a 2-
conductor wiring harness.

Figure 1-8. Signal Output Module

Figure 1-7. Multi-Loop I/O Motherboard 1-2.7.2 RELAY OUTPUT MODULE

The PEGAsys panel has the capacity for a maximum of 8 Aux-
1-2.7 Input/Output Modules iliary Relay Output cards, allowing up to 32 relays. Each Auxil-
The optional input/output modules allow the PEGAsys system iary Relay Output card is equipped with four (4), Form C,
to interface with external auxiliary devices. These auxiliary de- dry-contact relay outputs. The ability to isolate an individual relay
vices can be audible/visual signal devices, HVAC systems, el- output is provided through the system operator menu.
evator recall, power shut down, remote annunciators, agent/
sprinkler release system and any other control type input or
output which may need to be interfaced to the system.
The input and output modules plug into the motherboard as-
sembly located on the back plate of the system enclosure. Each
I/O module occupies one slot in the motherboard assembly which
has 8 slots available. The I/O modules and the CCM communi-
cate over the RS-485 based I/O bus, which uses a 6-conductor
phone type cable to connect the CCM to the motherboard.
The PEGAsys single-loop panel has the ability to support a
maximum of 16 I/O modules, in any combination. However, no
more than 8 of any one type of module can be used. If using a
City-Tie module, the limit is one per system.
The PEGAsys multi-Loop panel has the ability to support a maxi-
mum of 23 I/O modules, in any combination, on the system.
However, no more than 8 of any one type module can be used.
If using a City-Tie module, the limit is one per system.
The following paragraphs describe each available I/O module
in greater detail.

76-100016-001 1-3 August 1999

PEGAsys
Figure 1-9. Relay Output Module
1-2.7.3 AGENT RELEASE OUTPUT MODULE
The PEGAsys panel has the capacity for a maximum of 8 agent
release output modules, providing up to 8 release circuits and
24 maximum signal outputs on those modules.
Figure 1-10. Agent Release Output Module
1-2.7.4 CITY-TIE MODULE
The City-Tie (Notification) Module will provide connection and
operation for local energy, shunt type master box and reverse
polarity styles of output.
August 1999
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
76-100002-001
Figure 1-11. City Tie Module
1-2.8 Standby Batteries
Space is provided within the central control panel enclosure for
up to two (2) 12-V, 17 Amp Hour, sealed lead-acid batteries
used for 24, 60 or 90 hour standby operation. If additional bat-
teries are required, an optional battery enclosure is available.
The enclosure (Figure 1-12) is a heavy duty steel cabinet which
can house up to two 40AH batteries. For installation informa-
tion see Paragraph 7-9.1.
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
STANDBY BATTERIES
KIDDE
Figure 1-12. Battery Enclosure
1-2.9 Intelligent Loop Devices
The SmartOneTM Series of Intelligent Fire Alarm devices pro-
vide the PEGAsys control system with smoke and heat detec-
tion and necessary monitoring and control functions required
by todays advanced fire alarm systems. The following para-
graphs describe each available intelligent detection device.
Figure 1-13. SmartOne Detection Device
1-2.9.1 SmartOne IONIZATION DETECTORS
The SmartOne Ionization smoke detectors provide true distrib-
uted-intelligence, addressable microprocessor-based smoke
detection to the PEGAsys system.
1-4 76-100016-001
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System PEGAsys
1-2.9.2 SmartOne PHOTOELECTRIC DETECTORS
The SmartOne Photoelectric smoke detectors provide true dis-
tributed-intelligence, addressable microprocessor-based smoke
detection to the PEGAsys system.

1-2.9.3 SmartOne HEAT DETECTORS

The SmartOne Thermistor heat detectors provide true distrib-
uted-intelligence, addressable, microprocessor-based heat de-
tection to the PEGAsys system.

1-2.10 SmartOne Detector Bases

The SmartOne series of detection devices all use universal
mounting bases which are available in three styles. The 4SB is
a European-Style 4-inch base whose outside diameter matches
that of the low profile SmartOne detectors, which when com-
bined, provides a very attractive unit. The 4SB, shown in Figure
1-14, mounts to standard 3, 3.5-inch, or 100-mm electrical boxes
with ease.
Figure 1-16. Addressable Contact Input Device
1-2.12 Addressable Relay Output Devices
The addressable relay output device (P/N 70-408004-001) pro-
vides the PEGAsys system with a Form-C dry-contact interface
for remote control applications.

Figure 1-14. Four-inch Detector Base

The 6SB model, shown above, is a traditional style detector
base with an integral trim ring which provides coverage for any Figure 1-17. Addressable Relay Output Device
inconsistencies between the electrical box and ceiling material.
The 6SB mounts to standard 3, 3.5 and 4 inch electrical boxes 1-2.13 Model DH-2000 Air Duct Housing
with ease.
The DH-2000 air duct housing is designed for detecting par-
ticles of combustion products in air-handling systems.

Figure 1-15. 6-inch Detector Base

1-2.11 Addressable Contact Input Devices

The SmartOne Contact Monitor (P/N 70-407008-00X) allows
an installer the ability to interface typical NO/NC fire alarm de-
vices, such as water flow and tamper switches to the PEGAsys
system. The contact monitor is also used to interface to the
manual alarm, manual release and abort stations.
Figure 1-18. Air Duct Housing

76-100016-001 1-5 August 1999

PEGAsys Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System

1-2.14 Loop Isolator Devices Table 1-1. System Specifications

The SmartOne series of loop devices, shown in Figures 1-19 IT E M C H AR AC T E R IS T IC S

through 1-21, offer optional loop isolation which protects the
loop from wire to wire short conditions (NFPA Style 7.0). P o w er S u p p ly

*P o we r Re q ui re me nt: 120/220 V, 50/60 Hz

120 VA C , 1.9 A mp s
P.S . Inp ut (P e r Mo d ule )
220 VA C , .95 A mp s

P.S . Outp ut (P e r Mo d ule ) 24 V D C , 4 A mp s

B a t. C ha rg e r Outp ut: 26.4 V D C , 3A mp s

A ux. Outp uts: (2) 24 V D C , 1.5 A mp s e a ch

CCM

S i g na l Outp ut: 24 V D C , 2 A mp s

Re le a se Outp ut: 24 V D C , 2 A mp s
Figure 1-19. Loop Isolator, Stand-Alone Re la y C o nta ct Ra ti ng : 1 A mp @ 30 V D C

Tro ub le Re la y Ra ti ng : 1 A mp @ 30 V D C
SHORT-2 SHORT-1

J1
R X T X M o d u le

Ma x. Vo lta g e : 26.4 V D C
LOOP ISOLATOR

DS2 DS1
Mi n. Vo lta g e : 19.0 V D C
RX/TX

Underwriters
R Laboratories Inc. R Ma x. Li ne C a p a ci ta nce : 1.0 uF
LISTED

REFER TO
Ma x. Li ne Re si sta nce : 26 Ohms
INSTALLATION MANUAL
Ma x. A d d re ssa b le
P/N 76-100016-001 255 p e r RX TX
FOR MODULE INSTALL. KIDDE-FENWAL, INC. D e vi ce s:
PROCEDURES ASHLAND, MA 01721
R elease M o d u le

Figure 1-20. Loop Isolator, RX/TX Mount Re le a se Outp ut 2 A mp s @ 24 V D C

S i g na l Outp ut 2 A mp s @ 24 V D C e a ch

C a p a b le o f re le a si ng
Re le a se Outp ut Typ e : so le no i d s (sup p re ssi o n
a nd sp ri nkle r)

S ig n al Au d ib le M o d u le

(4) style " Y" o r (2) style

S i g na l Outp uts: " Z" 2 A mp s @ 24 V D C
e a ch

R elay M o d u le

Figure 1-21. Loop Isolator, 6" Detector Base Mount (4) Fo rm C C o nta cts,
C o nta ct Ra ti ng : 2 A mp s @ 30 V D C o r
1 A mp @ 120 VA C

C ity T ie M o d u le

1-3 SYSTEM SPECIFICATION 5 A mp s @ 24 V D C ,

S hunt C o nta ct:
Re si sti ve
System power specifications are outlined in Table 1-1.
500 mA ma x. @ 24 V D C ,
Lo ca l E ne rg y Outp ut:
C urre nt Li m.

Lo ca l E ne rg y S up e rvi so ry: 11 mA

Ma ste r B o x Tri p C urre nt

Lo ca l E ne rg y Lo a d :
0.25 A mp s. typ i ca l

*Refer to Appendix A for total system power and AC branch

circuit requirements.

August 1999 1-6 76-100016-001

Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System PEGAsys

CHAPTER 2
OPERATION

When an Alarm returns to a normal state (Alarm Off), the buzzer

2-1 INTRODUCTION
This chapter describes the PEGAsys system controls and in-
dicators located on the display panel. It also describes the
operating procedures and menu system.
2-2.1 Modes of Operation
There are two modes of PEGAsys system operation:
In the default operation the panel will be set to latch all
alarm inputs on the system. The latching operation will not
allow the loop input devices to generate an "alarm off" sig-
nal that would possibly interrupt a discharge time delay
sequence. To return the panel to normal the "RESET" but-
ton will need to be pushed.
The second mode of operation is non-latching. This option
can be enabled, using the PCS (PEGAsys Configuration
Software) to define if a loop device input is to be non-latch-
ing. The non-latching operation will allow the loop input
devices to generate an "Alarm Off" signal to the panel. When
this signal is received the panel would interrupt the dis-
charge time delay sequence of operation. However, all out-
puts that had been activated previous to the "Alarm Off"
signal will remain on and latched until the panel is reset.
The advantage of offering a latching or non-latching operation
per loop input device, allows the installer/designer to custom-
ize the system. This allows the inter mixing of latching and non-
latching devices to protect critical areas where both type may
be specified
will sound in a pulsed fashion, the alarm off condition must be
acknowledged to silence the buzzer. During the Trouble Off
condition, the audible device provides no sound. The following
summarizes the buzzer operation:
Alarm condition is indicated by a continuous ON signal,
Alarm OFF is indicated by a second ON second OFF
signal,
Trouble condition is indicated by a 1 second ON and 1 sec-
ond OFF continuous beeping,
Every individual change of status must be individually acknowl-
edged by pressing the ACKLDGE (acknowledge) pushbutton
to silence the Audible device.
2-2 CONTROLS AND INDICATORS
The control and indicators of the PEGAsys system are located
on the display panel, shown in Figure 2-1. The display panel is
mounted on top of the CCM. To gain access to the CCM, the
panel door must be open. Table 2-1 lists controls and indicators
for the display unit, giving name and functional description.
2-2.1 LCD Display
The display panel contains an 80-character (2X40) alphanu-
meric display. This LCD display is used to present system sta-
tus. In the procedure section of this chapter there will be several

System Status

POWER ON ALARM TROUBLE SUPERVISORY

GROUND FAULT PREALARM CPU ERROR SILENCE

ACKLDGE SILENCE RESET 1 2 3 4 5

SCROLL DRILL 6 7 8 9 0

Figure 2-1. System Front Panel

76-100016-001 2-1 August 1999

PEGAsys Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System

simulated LCD display readouts. The LCD display readouts c. Type in three or four digit password into keypad. Ensure a
will be used to aid users in the operation of the system. pound sign (#) appears for each key pressed.
NOTE: Use the default password, if a new password has not
2-2.2 Audible Device been set.
The Display Panel also contains an audible device which gen- d. ) key. Verify that the display reads:
Press the return (
erates two separate audible tones, one for alarms and one for
1:ISOLATE 2:LIST
troubles. This device sounds continuously when a new alarm
condition is received until the condition is acknowledged. It also 3:SET 4:TEST
sounds intermittently when a trouble, supervisory, or pre-alarm
condition is received until the condition is acknowledged.

2-2.3 Control and Indicator Description 2-4 SYSTEM POWER-UP

Refer to Table 2-1 for complete description of controls and indi-
cators.
2-3 SYSTEM SECURITY
The PEGAsys system provides three distinct levels of program
protection, as required by UL Standard 864. The user can only
access the system by entering a valid password. Typical valid
passwords consist of three or four characters but may be up to
eight characters in length.
2-3.1 Levels of Security
The three security levels are: Level One, Level Two, and Sys-
tem Manufacturer. The highest security level is reserved for the
system manufacturer. System owner is level one, system in-
staller is level two. Passwords consist of numeric characters (0
- 9) which allows access from the integral keypad of the CCM.
Alphanumeric characters can only be used with the PCS pro-
gram and if used they will lock out any possible entry using the
CCM keypad to gain entrance to the menus.
If alphanumeric passwords are necessary for a particular appli-
cation, it is recommended that the Level One password be nu-
meric and the Level Two password be alphanumeric so as to
allow the user to retrieve system information (system informa-
tion lists) and also prevent a user from changing any pro-
grammed system parameters.
2-3.2 Default Passwords
The PEGAsys system provides protection from unauthorized
entry to the system menus by utilizing two levels of default pass-
words, level one and level two. This feature provides two sepa-
rate passwords which increases the security of the system.
Default passwords are set when the system is shipped from
Kidde. These default passwords are:
Level One = 987
The following step-by-step procedure is for initial power-up of
the CCP.
a. Perform the installation check-out procedure in Chapter 7
of this manual.
b. Set the circuit breaker for the CCP power to ON. Verify that
the display reads "Main Processor Power On" and that the
CPU ERROR indicator is lit. Ensure that the audible device
is buzzing continuously.
c. Press the display module reset switch. Verify that the CPU
ERROR indicator is extinguished and the audible device is
silenced.
d. Verify that the display reads as follows:
MAIN PROCESSOR
POWER ON
e. After ten seconds, verify that the display reads as follows:
RXTX NON-MONITORING TROUBLE ON
RXTX1
NOTE: For multi-loop systems only. The above and below RX/
TX messages will repeat themselves for each RX/TX
module installed in the system. The above message
will be displayed while the system is initializing itself.
This initialization can take up to 90 seconds.
To clear the below RX/TX message use the AutoLearn
function from the menu function or upload the
configuration from the PCS program. If using PCS
software, verify that the correct number of RX/TX loops
are enabled in the Loops Topic of the configuration file
prior to uploading.
RX/TX 1 NOT REGISTERED ON
RX/TX LOOP 1
f. Verify that the POWER ON and TROUBLE indicators are
lit.
g. Connect the backup batteries to the CCP in accordance to
the procedure in Chapter 7.

Level Two = 1865 h. Press the ACKLDGE pushbutton. After approximately one
minute the display will momentarily read :
These default passwords are valid until other passwords are
RXTX NON-MONITORING TROUBLE OFF
programmed into the system.
i. Verify the display reads the incorrect time and date.
2-3.3 Entering Passwords j. Set time and date as follows:
The password entry procedure is listed below: (1) Press 0 (zero) key. Verify that the display reads:

a. Verify that the system status is displayed.

PLEASE ENTER PASSWORD
b. Press 0 (zero) key. Verify that the display reads: (2) Type in the default 1st level password (987).
(3) Press the return () key. Verify that the display reads:
PLEASE ENTER PASSWORD

August 1999 2-2 76-100016-001

Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System PEGAsys
Table 2-1. Control and Indicators

LED FUNCTION

When illuminated, indicates that the system is receiving AC input power. When
POWER ON off, indicates an AC input power failure has occurred (trouble condition) and the
system has switched to a battery standby condition.

When illuminated, indicates an alarm condition has been reported by an input

ALARM
device.

TROUBLE When illuminated, indicates a trouble condition exists in the system.

When illuminated, indicates a supervisory condition has been reported by a

SUPERVISORY
system-input device programmed for supervisory input.

When illuminated, indicates a ground fault has been detected on the 24 VDC line
GROUND FAULT
by the power supply monitor. The LCD will display either + / -.

When illuminated, indicates a smoke or heat detector has sensed a level of smoke
PRE-ALARM
or heat which exceeds the pre-alarm setpoint.

When illuminated, indicates CCM software has failed. The system defaults to
CPU ERROR
Zone Alarm / General Signal status.

SILENCE When illuminated, indicates the Signal/Audible outputs have been silenced.

SWITCH FUNCTION

When pressed after an Alarm ON (Alarm OFF if input device is set for non-
latching) Trouble, supervisory, or pre-alarm ON condition has occured, it silences
the panel's audible buzzer. The "ALARM", "TROUBLE", "SUPERVISORY", or
ACKNOWLEDGE
"PRE-ALARM" LED indicator glows steady to indicate that the condition has
been acknowledged. Subsequent conditions will cause the panel to resound the
above sequence.

When pressed after acknowledging current Alarm, it silences the system signal
outputs which have been programmed as silenceable. The "SILENCE" indicator
SILENCE
illuminates to indicate that the signal outputs have been silenced. Pressing the
"SILENCE" switch does not effect the Relay Output status.

When pressed after all active alarms have been acknowledged and cleared, the
system:
Resets auxiliary 24 VDC outputs used to power 4 wire detectors
RESET Resets all latched alarm conditions.
Returns all relays to their normal state.
Displays "System Reset" on the visual display.
Turns the "ALARM" and "ZONE ALARM" indicators off.

When pressed during an active alarm, trouble, or supervisory condition, will cause
the LCD to scroll through the active event buffer(s). The Alarm condition will not
SCROLL
allow supervisory or troubles to be viewed. Supervisory condition will not allow
the troubles buffer to be viewed.

When pressed and held for five seconds, the system will activate all signal
DRILL
outputs which have been programmed for drill activation.

NUMERIC KEYPAD (1-0) Use to enter password and system information into the menu system.

BACKSPACE Use to exit the menu system and to correct wrong entries.

RETURN Used as the Enter key when using the menu system.

76-100016-001 2-3 August 1999

PEGAsys
1:ISOLATE 2:LIST
3:SET 4:TEST
(4) Type in 3111 on the keypad. Verify that the display
reads:
SYSTEM TIME (AM/PM)
ENTER THE TIME _ _ : _ _ (HH:MM)
(5) Type in the time (HH=hours 0-12 and then MM=minutes
0-59). Press the return key. Verify that the display reads:
SYSTEM TIME (AM/PM)
1:AM 2:PM
(6) Type in appropriate selection (1 for AM or 2 for PM).
NOTE: If there has been a mistake in the entered data, press
the backspace key as many times as required to get to
the mistake, then re-enter data from that point.
k. The power-up procedure is complete at this point. The sys-
tem is now ready for loop device registration and program-
ming which is covered in this chapter.
2-5 SYSTEM MENUS
PEGAsys has a built-in menu structure. This menu structure
has been implemented to aid users with system operating func-
tions. The following paragraphs describe the menu structure,
accessing the menu, exiting the menu and menu functions. Fig-
ure 2-2 shows the system's Level One menu structure. Figure
2-3 shows the system's Level Two menu structure.
2-5.1 Menu Structure
The PEGAsys menu structure consists of a main menu, and
multiple sub-level menus. The sub-level menus may also con-
tain multiple sub-level menus. The main menu displays after
you enter a valid password. You can also access the Top Level
menu from any sub-level menu at almost anytime by pressing
the backspace key located on the keypad.
NOTE: The top level menu may not be available by using the
backspace key while certain types of programming are
being performed.
It is possible to access a previous higher level menu from a
lower level menu by pressing the backspace key.
The choices of available sub menus after a valid password has
been entered, correspond to the security level password that
has been entered.
The main menu for the 1st level, 2nd level, and Manufacturer
security level is:
1:ISOLATE 2:LIST
3:SET 4:TEST
Any one of the basic functions listed in a main menu can be
selected by pressing the numeric key of the systems keypad
which corresponds to the desired function. (Example: To select
the LIST function from the main menu, press the 2 key on the
system keypad.) You also select lower level functions from sub-
level menus using the numeric keys.
2-5.2 Accessing the System Menus
Perform the steps in Paragraph 2-3.3.
August 1999
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
2-5.3 Exiting the System Menus
To exit the system's menus, perform the following steps:
a. Press the backspace key as many times necessary to reach
the top level menu, shown in the top of the next column:
1:ISOLATE 2:LIST
3:SET 4:TEST
b. Press the backspace key. Verify that the system returns to
standby. The display should read:
SYSTEM STATUS NORMAL HH:MM MM-DD YR
40 CHARACTER CUSTOM MESSAGE
NOTE: When exiting the system menus, if the system is normal
the display panel should show the time and date as
shown in the above step.
2-5.4 Menu Functions
Tables 2-2 through 2-5 list and provide a brief description of all
functions that you can perform using the PEGAsys systems
menus. In addition, the tables provide the security access level
and a keystroke formula for each function. The keystroke for-
mula is a sequence of numbers you enter via the systems key-
pad to access a particular function. These formulas provide the
path from the main menu to the desired function. Formulas are
provided for each access level. After you enter the formula, some
of the functions require you to press the return key to start imple-
menting the function.
Most functions will require that you enter additional data to imple-
ment the function, such as a device address or desired alarm
threshold.
2-5.4.1 ISOLATE MENU FUNCTION
The isolate menu function (Table 2-2) permits the operator to
isolate field devices and output modules. Isolating any device
immediately places the system in a trouble condition, and ini-
tiates an audible trouble alarm and a printout with the time, date,
and device isolated. The feature is typically used to temporarily
isolate auxiliary devices during a system test.
2-5.4.2 LIST MENU FUNCTION
The list menu function (Table 2-3) permits the operator to list
various system parameters. All lists are real time actual system
conditions which are displayed and printed with the time and
date.
2-5.4.3 SET MENU FUNCTION
The set menu function permits the operator to program various
system parameters within the system. A few examples are shown
in Table 2-4.
2-5.4.4 TEST MENU FUNCTION
The test menu function, shown in Table 2-5, allows the operator
to test individual or a group of field devices. On command, a
detector or contact input device can be tested, and results will
be printed and displayed at the Central Control Panel. The Test
procedure in the device is activated by imposing a signal within
the device that will cause an alarm output. The Control Panel
verifies that an alarm output is generated and reports Test
Result OK for each device.
2-4 76-100016-001
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
2-6 MODES OF OPERATION
The PEGAsys system has four modes of operation. Each mode
has different indications and action required. The following Para-
graphs describe each mode, indications and action if required.
2-6.1 Normal Standby Mode
This is the typical mode of the system. In this mode, no alarm,
trouble, or supervisory conditions exist in the system. The sys-
tem display will show the time, day of the week, and date. For
example:
SYSTEM STATUS NORMAL 11:06 AM_05-04-90
40_CHARACTER_CUSTOM_MESSAGE
The system provides an option which allows the System Status
Normal message to be replaced with a display of battery charg-
ing voltage and current for the system standby batteries. For
example:
PS01_26.0 V_0.10_A_ _ _ _ _11:06 AM_05-04-90
40_CHARACTER_CUSTOM_MESSAGE
The green AC POWER LED will be illuminated to indicate that
the systems main power source is normal.
NOTE: In the Normal Standby Operation state, it is possible
for the 80-character display to show data other than
the time, day of date. This occurs when the system
menus are being accessed either locally or remotely
through one of its serial ports. This condition will be
indicated by the menu selections being displayed on
the display panel being illuminated.
In the Normal Standby Mode, no indicating LEDs will be illumi-
nated other than the AC POWER.
2-6.2 Active Alarm Mode
The system enters an alarm mode if a device (or devices) has
detected an alarm condition, such as smoke / heat above the
alarm threshold level. There are two types of alarms which can
occur:
Device Alarm
An alarm in which a device has communicated the alarm status
properly to the Central Control Panel, by providing the alarmed
device address for indication to the operator.
Zone Alarm
An alarm condition detected by one or several devices, but which
cannot be reported by a specific device due to a malfunction in
communications between the system and the alarmed device(s).
This is a redundant feature to increase system reliability and is
called Failsoft Mode.
NOTE: A device can signal a zone alarm to the system during
some communication failures.
2-6.2.1 ALARM MODE INDICATIONS
The following indicates the system is in its alarm mode of op-
eration.
a. The red ALARM LED will be illuminated and there will be
a continuous audible signal by the system buzzer at the
panel.
76-100016-001
PEGAsys
b. The 80-character display will cycle between all currently
active alarms. Example:
NOTE: If the alarm is a zone alarm, the Device Address 1000
- 8000 will be displayed depending on which RX/TX
module detects the zone alarm.
b. The outputs which have been previously programmed for
activation upon alarm by the specific devices will be turned
on. (Example: Signal audible signaling devices, control re-
lays for HVAC shutdown or elevator recall.)
2-6.2.2 ALARM MODE USER ACTION
The following steps should be performed when the system is
set into alarm.
a. Press the display panels ACKLDGE pushbutton to acknowl-
edge the displayed alarm condition. The 80-character dis-
play will continue to cycle between any remaining alarms
which have not been acknowledged. The ACKNOWL-
EDGE switch must be operated once for each alarm re-
ceived at the panel.
b. Once all current alarms have been acknowledged, the alarm
indicating circuits (audible devices) can be silenced by op-
erating the SILENCE switch.
c. After all of the current alarms have been acknowledged,
verify that the display reads: XXX ALARMS REMAIN. The
XXX representing the total of all active alarms. All active
alarms can be viewed on the display by pressing the scroll
pushbutton.
NOTE: The first 64 alarms will only be displayed. Subsequent
alarms over the initial 64 will not be displayed, even
when any or all of the first 64 alarms clear. However,
all alarms regardless of total will be processed in the
EOC. For a complete list of active alarms access the
event buffer menu using the CCM keypad.
d. Any subsequent alarms will cause the alarm audible cir-
cuits to resound. Each additional alarm must be acknowl-
edged before the alarm indicating circuits can be silenced.
e. When a device goes out of alarm, the display will indicate
the device address and an alarm off (AOF) message (non-
latching mode). Example:
1080 AOF_ _ _ _PHOTOELECTRIC DETECTOR
40_CHARACTER_LOCATION_MESSAGE
NOTE: If the alarm is a zone alarm, the address 1000-8000
will be displayed, indicating that active device(s) in
failsoft mode in the zone have gone out of alarm.
f. Each device which goes out of alarm must be acknowl-
edged with the ACKLDGE pushbutton (non-latching).
2-5 August 1999
PEGAsys Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System

Please Enter Password

1:ISOLATE 2:LIST 3:SET 4:TEST

1:LoopDevices 1:IsolatedDevices/Outputs 1:Time - Date 1:Lamp Test

2:SignalOutputs 2:EventBuffer 2:PrinterControl 2:Loop Device(Alarm Test)

3:RelayOutputs 3:Detector Level 3:Battery Test

4:Release Outputs 4:Active Events

5:City TieOutput 5:Programming

6:Digital I/O 6:Assignments

7:Voltages

Figure 2-2. Level One Menu Structure

August 1999 2-6 76-100016-001

Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System PEGAsys

Please Enter Password

1:ISOLATE 2:LIST 3:SET 4:TEST

1:Loop Devices 1:Isolated Devices/Outputs 1:Time - Date 1:Lamp Test

2:Signal Outputs 2:EventBuffer 2:Printer 2:Loop Device(Alarm Test)

3:Relay Outputs 3:DetectorLevel 3:Devices 3:Battery Test

4:Release Outputs 4:Active Events 4:Programming 4:WalkTest

5:CityTieOutput 5:Programming 5:Unused 5:Alarm Simulation Test

6:Digital I/O
6:GlobalI/O 6:Assignments

7:Global
6:GlobalI/O 7:Voltages

Figure 2-3. Level Two Menu Structure

76-100016-001 2-7 August 1999

PEGAsys Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System

Table 2-2. Isolate Menu Function

Access
Function Description Formula
Level

Isolate Loop Device Isolate/De-isolate an RCU by address 1-1 1/2/M

Isolate I/O Module Signal Output Isolate/De-isolate a signal module output circuit by address 1-2-1 1/2/M

Isolate I/O Module Release Signal Output Isolate/De-isolate a release module signal output by address. 1-2-2 1/2/M

Isolate CCM Signal Output Isolate/De-isolate A CCM signal output 1-2-3 1/2/M

Isolate I/O Module Relay Output Isolate/De-isolate a I/O module relay output by address 1-3-1 1/2/M

Isolate CCM Relay Output Isolate/De-isolate CCM relay output 1-3-2 1/2/M

Isolate I/O Module Release Output Isolate/De-isolate an agent release output by output address 1-4-1 1/2/M

Isolate/De-isolate an agent release output by CCM output

Isolate CCM Agent Release Output 1-4-2 1/2/M
address

Isolate City Tie Output Isolate/De-isolate city tie module by output address 1-5 1/2/M

Isolate Digital Input/Output Isolate/De-isolate digital input/output by I/O address 1-6 1/2/M

Global Isolate Inputs Isolate/De-isolate all system input loop devices; I/O modules 1-7-1 2/M

Global Isolate Outputs Isolate/De-isolate all system output I/O modules 1-7-2 2/M

NOTE: 1 = LEVEL ONE, 2 = LEVEL TWO, M = MANUFACTURER LEVEL

Table 2-3. List Menu Function

Access
Function Description Formula
Level

List Isolated Loop Devices List all Loop Devices which are isolated 2-1-1-1 1/2/M

List Isolated I/O Modules List all I/O modules which are isolated 2-1-2-1 1/2/M

List Isolated CCM outputs List all CCM outputs which are isolated 2-1-2-2 1/2/M

List Event History Buffer(All

Lists all recorded event history entries from buffer 2-2-1 1/2/M
Events)

List Event History Lists a user selectable range of event history entries by
2-2-2 1/2/M
Buffer(Range of Events) date

List a Single Detector Displays a selected detectors real time smoke / heat level 2-3-1 1/2/M

Lists all system detectors pre-alarm and alarm setpoints

List Detector Level 2-3-2 1/2/M
and present level.

List Active Alarm(s) List all active system alarm(s). 2-4-1 1/2/M

List Active Supervisory

List all active system supervisory conditions. 2-4-2 1/2/M
Conditions

List Active Trouble Condition List all active system trouble conditions 2-4-3 1/2/M

List EOC Program List EOC program lines 2-5-1 1/2/M

List RTC Program List RTC program lines 2-5-2 1/2/M

List Loop Device Addresses List all loop devices registered into the system 2-6-1 1/2/M

List I/O Module Addresses List all I/O modules registered into the system 2-6-2 1/2/M

List PC Line Voltage Levels Lists PC line voltage levels at each specified loop device 2-7-1 1/2/M

List Loop Device 9VDC

Lists specified loop device 9 volt power supply level 2-7-2 1/2/M
power supply level

NOTE: 1 = LEVEL ONE, 2 = LEVEL TWO, M = MANUFACTURER LEVEL

August 1999 2-8 76-100016-001

Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System PEGAsys
Table 2-4. Set Menu Function

Access
Function Description Formula
Level

Set System Time Allows user to set system time 3-1-1 1/2/M

Set System Date Allows user to set system date 3-1-2 1/2/M

Allow user to set display of battery charging voltage and

Set Display of Battery(V+I) 3-1-3 1/2/M
current.

Set Internal Printer Enable port for internal printer connection 3-2-1-1 1/2/M

Disable Internal Printer Disable port for internal printer connection 3-2-1-2 1/2/M

Set External Printer Enable port for external printer connection 3-2-2-1 1/2/M

Disable External Printer Disable port for external printer connection 3-2-2-2 1/2/M

Set Device Address Allows user to change device address. 3-3-1 2/M

Set Ionization Detector Allows user to adjust Ionization detector Prealarm and alarm
3-3-2-1 2/M
Sensitivity settings

Set Photoelectric Detector Allows user to adjust Photoelectric detector Prealarm and alarm
3-3-2-2 2/M
Sensitivity settings

Set Thermal Detector Allows user to adjust Thermal detector Prealarm and alarm
3-3-2-3 2/M
Sensitivity settings

Register Devices Allows user to register loop devices into system configuration 3-3-3 2/M

Allows user to de-register loop devices from system

De-Register Devices 3-3-4 2/M
configurations.

Blink Control Allows user to disable detector LED blinking 3-3-5 2/M

Set Day/Night Mode Allows user to enable detector for day function. 3-4-1-1 2/M

Set Day / Night Periods Allows user to set Day / Night periods 3-4-1-2 2/M

Activate Day Mode Allows user to activate Day mode 3-4-1-3 2/M

Set 1st level Password Allows user to set 1st level password 3-4-2-1 2/M

Set 2nd level Password Allows user to set 2nd level password. 3-4-2-2 2/M

Enable RTC Program Allows user to enable RTC program line to function 3-4-3-1 2/M

Disable RTC Program Allows user to disable RTC program line from functioning. 3-4-3-2 2/M

Set AutoLearn Mode Allows user to activate the AutoLearn Function 3-4-4 2/M

Allows user to set the alarm verification function and time period
Set Alarm Verification 3-4-5 2/M
for individual detectors or range of detectors.

Set PAS Function Allows user to set the positive alarm sequence for devices 3-4-6 2/M

Clear Event Log Allows user to clear event history buffer entries 3-4-7 2/M

Global Acknowledge Enable Enables the Global Acknowledge Feature 3-8-1 2/M

Global Acknowledge Disable Disnables the Global Acknowledge Feature 3-8-2 2/M

NOTES: 1. For installation in the state of California, Alarm Verification Time must not exceed 30 seconds.
2. 1 = LEVEL ONE, 2 = LEVEL TWO, M = MANUFACTURER LEVEL

76-100016-001 2-9 August 1999

PEGAsys Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System

Table 2-5. Test Menu Functions

Access
Function Description Formula
L evel

Lamp Test Enable user to test system LEDs functionality 4-1 1/2/M

Allows user to activate an electronic test of a detector or

Loop Device Test 4-2-1 1/2/M
group of detectors

Battery Test Allows user to activate a battery test to verify battery capacity 4-3 1/2/M

Enable Walk Test Allows user to specify a range of devices to Walk Test 4-4-1 2/M

Disable Walk Test Allows user to disable walk test mode 4-4-2

Allows installer to verify programmed relation ship of inputs to

Alarm Simulation Test 4-5 2/M
outputs by activating inputs and verifying outputs are active.

NOTE: 1. WARNING: The Alarm Simulation Test must be used with care. When activated the Alarm Simulation Test (AST)
processes pre-programmed outputs which are related to the activated (simulated) input device. Before using AST ensure
that any associated outputs are disconnected or isolated to prevent unexpected outputs (releases, signals or shutdowns).
2. 1 = LEVEL ONE, 2 = LEVEL TWO, M = MANUFACTURER LEVEL

For latching mode: To return the system to normal, press

the RESET button once. If powering 4-wire detector from
the PEGAsys, the reset button will need to be pushed once
to reset the detector and once to reset the panel to a nor-
mal condition.
g. In a non-latching operation once all alarms have cleared,
the display will read: NO ACTIVE ALARM REMAINS. At
this time, the system may be reset by operating the RESET
pushbutton.
h. When the system is properly reset, the display will show
the System Status Normal message, time, day and date.
The preceding will happen if no active troubles or
supervisories are present, in which case the Active
Troubles or Active Supervisories message will be dis-
played.
2-6.3 Active Supervisory Trouble Mode
The system enters supervisory trouble mode when it detects an
abnormal condition on the system that has been defined to be a
much higher priority than a common trouble. This type of trouble
is usually assigned by the installer/designer to monitor critical
parts of the system.
2-6.3.1 SUPERVISORY TROUBLE MODE INDICATION
The following indicates the system is in the supervisory trouble
mode of operation.
a. The yellow SUPERVISORY and TROUBLE LEDs will be
flashing at a 1 second rate and there will be a pulsing buzzer
at the CCM. This audible is distinctively different than an
alarm signal pattern at the CCM.
b. The 80 character display will cycle between all currently
active supervisory troubles. Example:
2-6.3.2 SUPERVISORY TROUBLE MODE USER ACTION
The following steps should be performed when the system is
set into supervisory trouble mode of operation:
a. To silence the supervisory trouble audible signal, all cur-
rent supervisories must be acknowledged by pressing the
ACKLDGE push button. This will silence the system buzzer.
b. When all supervisory trouble conditions have been acknowl-
edged, the 80 character display will read: XXX ACTIVE
SUPERVISORY TROUBLES REMAIN. XXX representing
the total number of active supervisory troubles. All current
trouble conditions can be viewed on the display by press-
ing the scroll push button.
c. As each supervisory trouble condition is cleared, the dis-
play will read one less active trouble until all supervisories
are clear. When all active supervisory troubles have been
cleared, the SUPERVISORY and TROUBLE LEDs will be
extinguished and the 80 character display will show the
Standby Message. (For example: "System Status Normal")
NOTE: The system has the option to acknowledge both
supervisory and common troubles on a global basis.
The panel by default will require that each trouble be
acknowledged individually. However, if the installer
wishes to enable this function it can be done by
accessing the "set" menu option using the CCM
keypad. Refer to Table 2-4 for more information on
stepping through the menus to enable and disable

August 1999 2-10 76-100016-001

Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
the Global Acknowledge function. With global
acknowledge a total of 30 troubles can be
acknowledged at one time.
2-6.4 Active Trouble Mode
The system enters trouble mode when it detects an abnormal
condition which may prevent proper operation or display a
prealarm condition. (Example: loss of communications with a
smoke detector.) Refer to Appendix G for a complete list of
trouble conditions.
2-6.4.1 TROUBLE MODE INDICATIONS
The following indicates the system is in its trouble mode of
operation.
a. The yellow TROUBLE LED will be flashing at a 1 second
rate and there will be a pulsing panel buzzer at the CCP.
This audible signal is distinctively different than the alarm
audible signal.
b. The 80 character display will cycle between all currently
active troubles and prealarms. Example:
2-6.4.2 TROUBLE MODE USER ACTION
The following steps should be performed when the system is
set into the trouble mode of operation:
a. To silence the trouble audible signal, all current trouble
conditions must be acknowledged by pressing the
ACKLDGE pushbutton. This will silence the system buzzer.
b. When all trouble conditions have been acknowledged, the
80-character display will read: XXX ACTIVE TROUBLES
REMAIN. XXX representing the total number of active
troubles. All current trouble conditions can be viewed on
the display by pressing the scroll pushbutton.
NOTE: The first 300 troubles (supervisory or common) on a
Single-Loop will be displayed only. Subsequent troubles
or supervisories will not be displayed even if any or all
300 troubles clear. However, all of the active troubles
or supervisories will be processed and entered into the
event buffer. For a complete listing of all troubles and
supervisories over the initial 300, access the event
buffer using the event buffer using the CCM keypad.
For the Multi-Loop the first 2100 troubles or
supervisories will be displayed. Subsequent troubles
or supervisories over the first 2100 will not be displayed
even if any or all 2100 troubles or supervisories clear.
However, all troubles or supervisories regardless of the
total will be processed and entered into the event buffer.
For a complete listing of all active troubles and
supervisories, access the event buffer through the CCM
keypad.
76-100016-001
PEGAsys
c. As each trouble condition is cleared, the display will read one
less active trouble until all troubles are cleared. When all ac-
tive troubles have been cleared, the TROUBLE LED will be
extinguished and the 80-character display will show the
standby message (For example: "System Status Normal").
NOTE: The system has the option to acknowledge both
supervisory and common troubles on a global basis.
The panel by default will require that each trouble be
acknowledged individually. However, if the installer
wishes to enable this function it can be done by
accessing the "set" menu option using the CCM
keypad. Refer to Table 2-4 for more information on
stepping through the menus to enable and disable the
Global Acknowledge function. With global acknowledge
a total of 30 troubles can be acknowledged at one time.
2-7 PRINTING OPERATION
In addition to the LCD display, the PEGAsys system informa-
tion can be viewed using the Printer port of the CCM. For de-
tailed information pertaining to connecting a RS-232 peripheral
device, see the Chapter 7, Paragraph 7-18.
When the printer port is enabled and a serial printer is attached
the system will print out all status change information and any
system information lists that the user would request from the
system using the integral keypad.
Serial-type annunciator devices may be connected to the printer
port to provide graphical LED annunciator type indications to
building occupants. Contact Kidde application engineering for
compatible annunciator vendors.
2-8 SYSTEM PROGRAMMING
The PEGAsys fire alarm system incorporates two unique pro-
gramming languages that are easy to understand and use.
These two versatile programming languages, Event Output
Control (EOC) and Real Time Control (RTC), can accommo-
date most any fire alarm control logic application. Programming
the system is accomplished by a personal computer via a sys-
tem interface cable.
The two programs are constructed by the system Engineer/In-
staller using the PEGAsys Configuration Software (PCS) pro-
gram which is Windows based. The PCS program allows the
user to configure, verify, upload, download, edit, retrieve, store
and print the entire system configuration program. Refer to the
PCS users guide (P/N 76-014) for further details.
2-8.1 EOC Programming
The Event Output Control (EOC) program logically combines the
systems input devices with the system's output devices. The pro-
gram consists of sequentially numbered lines of equations con-
taining input addresses, output addresses and logic operators.
When an input becomes true (Active), the system processes the
EOC program and activates any associated outputs as pro-
grammed.
2-11 August 1999
PEGAsys
EXAMPLE:
The simplest event output control (EOC) equation would be:
Input = Output
A basic equation with one or more inputs would be :
Input Operator Input = Output
The system normally processes the EOC from left to right. However,
in equations with parenthesis the contents of the parenthesis are
executed first. Refer to the PCS users guide (76-014) for further
details.
2-8.1.1 LISTING EOC PROGRAMMING
The system's Event Output Control (EOC) program can be listed
out using either the owner's or installer's menu functions. To list the
systems EOC programming:
a. Access PEGAsys system menus by:
(1) Press 0 (zero) key. Verify that the display reads:
PLEASE ENTER PASSWORD
(2) Type in the Level 1 or Level 2 password.
(3) Press the return () key. Verify that the display reads:
1:ISOLATE 2:LIST
3:SET 4:TEST
b. Select the list EOC program by typing the function formula, 2-5-
1.
The system will then list all lines of the Event Output Control pro-
gramming on the LCD and any attached printer.
2-8.2 RTC Programming
The RTC program language permits outputs to be controlled by the
systems real time clock. Outputs may be programmed to occur on
an hour, day, week and month time control basis. Alarm and Prealarm
threshold levels of all or individual detectors can be increased or de-
creased in sensitivity (within UL limits) under RTC control. The RTC
programming also provides the ability to control RCU relays, I/O
module Relays and smoke detector pre alarm and alarm set points.
The program consists of sequentially numbered lines each contain-
ing control object, control content, time, date and day of week. For
further details refer to the PCS users guide.
2-8.2.1 LISTING RTC PROGRAMMING
The RTC program can be listed out using either the owners or in-
stallers menu functions. To list the RTC programming:
a. Access the PEGAsys system menus by:
(1) Press 0 (zero) key. Verify that the display reads:
PLEASE ENTER PASSWORD
(2) Type in the Level 1 or Level 2 password.
(3) Press the return () key. Verify that the display reads:
1:ISOLATE 2:LIST
3:SET 4:TEST
b. Select the list RTC program by typing the function formula, 2-5-
2.
The system will then list all lines of the Real Time Control program-
ming on the LCD and any attached printer.
2-8.2.2 ENABLE/DISABLE RTC PROGRAM LINE NUMBERS
August 1999
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
Each line number of the RTC Program is automatically enabled when
entered into the system. Once a line number in the RTC Program
has been disabled using the procedure below, the line will be ignored
by the RTC Program until enabled. To enable a line number which
has been previously disabled follow the below procedure selecting
"ENABLE" in step b.
a. Access the PEGAsys system menus by:
(1) Press 0 (zero) key. Verify that the display reads:
PLEASE ENTER PASSWORD
(2) Type in the Level 1 or Level 2 password.
b. Select the set RTC program by typing the function formula, 3-4-
3. Verify the display reads:
1:ENABLE 2:DISABLE
c. Select the desired choice and press return. Verify the display
reads:
RTC LINE NUMBER _ _ _
d. Type the three digit line number and press the return key.
e. You may continue with another RTC line or press backspace
key to cancel this function.
2-8.3 Types of Inputs and Outputs
The PEGAsys has various input and output devices/modules which
are discussed in the following paragraphs:
2-8.3.1 SYSTEM INPUTS
Devices which are classified as system inputs are smoke detectors,
heat detectors, and addressable contact monitors (alarm, trouble,
abort, waterflow, manual alarm, manual release, supervisory, and
normal). Refer to the PCS users (76-014) guide for further details.
2-8.3.2 REMOTE CONTROL UNIT (RCU)
The RCU input and output devices, which are connected to the RX/
TX loop(s), are specified in EOC programming by the devices four
digit address.
2-8.3.3 RX/TX LOOPS
The system specifies the RX/TX loop controller using its loop num-
ber followed by three zeros (1000 for RX/TX 1) in single loop sys-
tems and (1000 - 8000) in multi-loop systems. The specifier (1000
-8000) will appear in cases when trouble conditions are present on a
particular RX/TX loop controller (i.e., a PC Line Short on RX/TX 1 -
would be displayed as "RX/TX PC Line Short Loop 1").
RX/TX loop (zone) alarms occur if a loop device alarm initiates under
one of the following conditions:
Failed communications between the CCM and RX/TX module
(Trouble Condition)
Failed RX/TX processor. (Trouble Condition)
Failed input circuit of RCU device.
An alarmed input device on the RX/TX (in FailSoft mode) can only
activate EOC programming if the RX/TX zone is used as a pro-
grammed input (ZA1=1000, ZA2=2000, ZA8 = 8000, etc.).
2-8.3.4 SYSTEM OUTPUTS
Devices which are classified as system outputs are CCM - sig-
nals and relays (programmable / non programmable); I/O mod-
ules - signal outputs, relay outputs, agent release outputs, release
2-12 76-100016-001
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
signal outputs, city tie outputs and digital I/O module outputs; Loop
devices - addressable relay output module.
2-8.3.5 SYSTEM I/O MODULES
The Input/Output modules which the systems support are Signal
Outputs, Relay Outputs, Agent Release (agent & signal) outputs
and the City Tie output.
2-8.4 Addressing I/O Modules
The I/O modules include: Signal Audible, Relay Output, Agent
Release Output, City Tie output and the power supply module.
I/O modules refer to any I/O module which installs into the op-
tional I/O mother board with exception of the power supply
module(s). The I/O modules communicate with the CCM over
the I/O bus.
Each module has inputs or outputs which can be individually
addressed. The I/O address consists of two alphabetic and two
numeric characters which define the module type, address and
I/O circuit number. The I/O module address scheme is shown
below.
SG 1 : 3
I/O Circuit Number (1-4),
See note 1.
Module Address (1-8),
See note 2.
Module Type,
See note 3.
SG - Signal / Audible Output
RY - Relay Output
CT - City Tie Output
AR - Agent Release Output
RS - Release Signal Output
PS - Power Supply Monitor Module
NOTES:
1. The I/O modules vary in amount of inputs and outputs. Refer
to section one component description for thorough descrip-
tions of options.
2. The PEGAsys system can support a total of 16 I/O modules
for single loop and 23 I/O modules for multi-loop, 8 maximum of
any one type.
3. Power supply monitors only need an address, they have no
need for an output number.
The I/O module address is set using the three dip switches con-
tained on each PCB assembly, each module uses different num-
bered switches for module address assignment. The address
is set during the installation procedure by placing the switches
into the correct position. Refer to the appropriate figure in Ap-
pendix I for the particular module you are working with and the
addressing matrix. For a functional description of each module,
refer to Chapter 3.
The switches would be set for each type of module in order. For
example signal modules would be addressed 1 -8 if there were
eight in the system, relay modules would be addressed 1 - 8 if
76-100016-001
PEGAsys
there were eight in the system, and the same holds true for the
remaining modules with the only exception being the City Tie mod-
ule there can only be one of these modules in a system at any
time.
2-8.5 Registering I/O Module Assignments
I/O modules are registered into the system configuration through
the use of the PCS program. The installer would configure all
modules in the PCS program file and then upload this file to the
system which would then internally verify the existence of the speci-
fied modules. For further details on I/O module registration refer
to the PCS users guide.
Added RX/TX Modules in the multi-loop systems are automati-
cally registered by the CCM upon system power-up.
2-8.5.1 LISTING I/O MODULE ASSIGNMENT
All I/O modules which are programmed into the system con-
figuration may be listed out with the use of either the owners or
installers menu functions.
a. Access the PEGAsys system menus by:
(1) Press 0 (zero) key. Verify that the display reads:
PLEASE ENTER PASSWORD
(2) Type in the Level 1 or Level 2 password.
(3) Press the return () key. Verify that the display reads:
1:ISOLATE 2:LIST
3:SET 4:TEST
b. Select the list I/O address assignments by typing the func-
tion formula, 2-6-2.
The system will then list all of the registered I/O module ad-
dresses on the LCD and any attached printer.
2-8.6 Addressing RCUs
RCUs refer to all devices which connect and operate from the
RX/TX PC (power/communications) Line. These devices include
SmartOne smoke detectors, SmartOne heat detectors, addres-
sable contact input monitors, and addressable output contact
modules.
Each device has a three digit numeric address. This address is
stored in the non-volatile EEPROM memory of the device. The
system address is defined by the CCM by these three digits
and a fourth digit representing the RX/TX channel number.
There are three ways to address the RCU (Loop) devices.
The RCUs can be addressed using the Hand Held Pro-
grammer (P/N 74-200013-001). This optional unit provides
a convenient means of addressing RCUs without using the
CCM.
The user may address the devices individually on the sys-
tem by performing the procedure listed below.
To address RCUs using the SET RCU Address menu function
each unaddressed RCUs must be connected to the RX/TX PC
line one at a time. Perform the following steps for each RCU:
a. Access the PEGAsys system menus by:
(1) Press 0 (zero) key. Verify that the display reads:
PLEASE ENTER PASSWORD
(2) Type in the Level 2 password.
(3) Press the return () key. Verify that the display reads:
2-13 August 1999
PEGAsys
1:ISOLATE 2:LIST
3:SET 4:TEST
b. Select the set RCU address function by typing the function
formula, 3-3-1. Verify that the display reads:
PRESENT LOOP DEVICE ADDRESS _ _ _ _
NOTE: All new addressable devices have an address of zero
(000).
c. Enter the present RCU address and press return
pushbutton. The system will display the following:
TARGET LOOP DEVICE ADDRESS _ _ _ _
d. Enter the desired address for the RCU / Detector, press
return. The system will now change the RCU address if
different than previously noted.
The 40 character owner location message cannot be entered
using the system keypad. The owners location message can
only be entered by use of the PCS program and uploaded into
system memory.
2-8.7 Registering RCUs
Registration is where the device address is joined with the de-
vice information in the system's memory. Device information is
comprised of; Device type, Device Messages and Device set-
tings.
There are four ways to register the RCU (Loop) devices on to
the system.
The user may register the devices individually on the sys-
tem
Register all pre-addressed RCUs at once using RCU (Loop
Devices) registration function
Register all pre-addressed RCUs using the Autolearn func-
tion, which sets all devices at default values and any sys-
tem alarm input activates all system outputs. If pre-addressed
devices are used, multiple devices can be attached and reg-
istered to the system all at one time using either the Autolearn
or RCU Registration function.
RCUs can also be registered into the system by using the
PCS program. The installer would specify each RCU to be
connected to the system and then upload the system con-
figuration file to the system and then the system would su-
pervise each device specified. Refer to the PCS users guide
for further details on RCU registration.
1004
001-255 = Device Address (registered)
000 = Device Address (un addressed/
un registered)
RXTX Loop Number
1 for single Loop Systems,
1-8 for Multi-Loop Systems
Example: RCU 1032 represents device 32 on RX/TX loop 1.
Connecting an unregistered RCU address (address 000) to the
RX/TX will result in a not registered trouble (TBL NR) indicating
that the control panel has communicated with the device and iden-
tified the device as being unregistered.
Procedures for registering RCU devices using the register RCU func-
August 1999
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
tion would be to attach all pre addressed loop devices to the PC line
of the RX/TX module. Power up the system (if it is not already run-
ning). As the loop devices power up they will begin to communicate
with the RX/TX module. The CCM will recognize the loop devices as
not being not registered and raise a trouble for each not registered
(TBL NR) device attached. When the register RCU function is en-
abled the CCM will prompt the user to enter a range of loop device
addresses to register as valid system devices. At the conclusion of
the register function the CCM will display the total amount of devices
registered.
The AutoLearn function works much the same as the registration
function, where it will automatically enter the devices which it can
identify on the PC line of the RX/TX as not being registered into
system configuration memory.
During both the Autolearn and RCU Registration procedures the
CCM will automatically register the loop devices into memory and
also set each device to default settings (Sensitivity levels and
Input reporting) for the particular device. The CCM will also set the
default operation of the CCM outputs (MP01, MP02, MP03 and
MP04). Any system alarm received after this time will cause all
the CCM outputs (MP01 - MP04) to activate.
Optionally, if the I/O motherboard and I/O modules have been
installed, the PCS program will need to be used to configure the
system for use with the I/O modules. Procedures for registering I/
O modules are provided in the PCS Users Guide (See Address-
ing I/O Modules).
2-8.7.1 DETECTOR REGISTRATION
SmartOne smoke and heat detectors would be registered on to
the system in the same fashion as the RCUs explained in the
previous section. The only other information which requires se-
lecting is detection devices application, the alarm and pre-alarm,
levels and latching or non-latching. There are three specific ap-
plications for smoke detector use: Open Area, Open Area (High
Air Flow) and Duct. The smoke and heat detectors pre-alarm and
alarm set points are adjusted only when necessary if the user
desires the set points to be different from the default values for
each detector type.
The detectors will use the default values unless otherwise pro-
grammed. To adjust the set points for the detectors, refer to Chapter
5 Setting and Adjusting Smoke and Heat Detector Sensitivities.
The 40 character owner location message cannot be entered
using the system keypad. The owners location message can
only be entered by use of the PCS program and uploaded into
system memory.
2-8.7.2 ADDRESSABLE CONTACT MONITOR
REGISTRATION
The addressable contact monitor are registered on to the system
in the same fashion as the RCUs explained in the previous sec-
tion. The system will by default, set the response of the device
activation to alarm. During system configuration using the PCS
program the following choices are allowed - Alarm, Trouble, Abort,
Supervisory, Manual Alarm, Manual Release, WaterFlow or Nor-
mal. The following table describes the allowable selections for
the input RCU and their EOC relationships.
Contact monitor RCUs are also registered into the system by
using the PCS program. The installer would specify each Contact
Monitor RCU to be connected to the system and then upload the
system configuration file to the system and then the system would
supervise each device specified. Refer to the PCS users guide
2-14 76-100016-001
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
for further details on RCU registration.
1: Alarm
Active input initiates an alarm at the central control
panel and is latched in the EOC until the system is
reset after alarm has cleared.
2: Trouble
Active input initiates a trouble at the central control
panel, but does not latch EOC programming and will
self restore upon deactivation.
3: Abort
Active input initiates an abort condition at the central
control panel. This will delay agent release if count-
down has begun. It does not latch EOC program and
will self restore upon deactivation. There are 4 styles
of abort available for the device.
4: Waterflow
Active input initiates a waterflow alarm condition at the
central control panel and is latched in EOC program
until reset. Signal outputs will be inhibited from being si-
lenced.
5: Manual Alarm
Active input initiates a manual alarm condition at the
central control panel, latches in EOC program until
reset.
6: Manual Release
Active input initiates a manual release condition at the
central control panel, causes instant release of pro-
grammed output, latches in EOC program until reset
7: Normal
Active input initiates a momentary display but does not
latch in EOC program, self restores.
8: Supervisory
Active input initiates a supervisory trouble at the cen-
tral control panel, but does not latch the EOC, and will
self-restore upon deactivation.
The 40 character owner location message cannot be entered
using the system keypad. The owners location message can
only be entered by use of the PCS program and uploaded into
system memory.
2-8.7.3 REMOTE RELAY REGISTRATION
The addressable contact output device is registered in the
same fashion as the previous RCU's.
Contact Output RCUs can also be registered into the system
by using the PCS program. The installer would specify each
Contact Output RCU to be connected to the system and then
upload the system configuration file to the system and then the
system would supervise each device specified. Refer to the PCS
users guide (76-014) for further details on RCU registration.
The 40-character owner location message cannot be entered
using the system keypad. The owners location message can
only be entered by use of the PCS program and uploaded into
system memory.
2-8.7.4 LISTING ALL REGISTERED RCUs
All RCUs registered on the system can be listed using either the
owners or installers menu function. To list all registered RCUs
76-100016-001
PEGAsys
a. Access the PEGAsys system menus by:
(1) Press 0 (zero) key. Verify that the display reads:
PLEASE ENTER PASSWORD
(2) Type in the Level 1 or Level 2 password.
(3) Press the return () key. Verify that the display reads:
1:ISOLATE 2:LIST
3:SET 4:TEST
b. Select the List RCU address function by typing the function
formula, 2-6-1. Verify that the display and any attached print-
ers list all registered RCU addresses.
2-8.7.5 UN-REGISTERING RCUs
The system provides the capability to remove a single device or
group of devices from the system configuration. This function
removes the device address from the system memory but leaves
the address in the device intact. Performing this operation will
cause the system to generate a trouble NR (Not Registered) for
any devices which remain connected to the RX/TX PC line.
Removal or disconnection of the device(s) from the PC line will
clear the trouble condition(s) on the system.
This function would be used during a system retrofit where some
devices may be desired to be removed from the system tempo-
rarily during a building renovation and then reattached after reno-
vations are complete. This feature is very efficient because the
device maintains its address information which speeds device
reregistering after the renovations.
To perform the device un-registering operation perform the fol-
lowing:
a. Access the PEGAsys system menus by:
(1) Press 0 (zero) key. Verify that the display reads:
PLEASE ENTER PASSWORD
(2) Type in the Level 1 or Level 2 password.
(3) Press the return () key. Verify that the display reads:
1:ISOLATE 2:LIST
3:SET 4:TEST
b. Select the set RCU De-Registration function by typing the
function formula, 3-3-4. Verify that the display reads:
DEVICE DE-REGISTRATION
DEVICE FROM_ _ _ _TO_ _ _ _
c. Enter the desired RCU address(s) and press return. The
display will read the following in response to verify the de-
vice de-registration:
DEVICE DE-REGISTRATION
XX DEVICES DE-REGISTERED
d. Verify that the display changes to the device menu after 5
seconds. The backspace key can be pressed to return to
the main menu.
e. To reregister RCU devices, perform the procedure which is out-
lined in the RCU registration paragraph in this chapter.
2-15 August 1999
PEGAsys Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System

(THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK)

August 1999 2-16 76-100016-001

Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System PEGAsys

CHAPTER 3
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

Central Control Module

3-1 INTRODUCTION Display Module
This chapter provides a functional description of the devices/ RX/TX Module
modules used in the PEGAsys system configuration. Each func- I/O Module
tional description covers one of the blocks shown in the overall
RCUs (Field Devices)
block diagram, Figure3-1.
Power Supply Module
As described in Paragraph 1-1.2, the system comes in two con-
figurations the single-loop system and multi-loop system. The
3-2 BLOCK DIAGRAM above devices/modules for both configurations are shown in
the Overall Functional Block Diagrams, Figures 3-1 and 3-2.
The PEGAsys system is divided into seven functional blocks as
Each device/module is described in detail in Paragraph 3-3.
follows:

Display
Module
Central
Control RX/TX CCM
Module Comm Receiver/ Power/Comm
Transmitter Line RCU's
24 VDC
Module (Field Devices)
I/O Bus (RX/TX)
AC Line
Power 24 VDC

Battery Supply
Backup I/O Bus I/O Bus
Optional Optional
I/O I/O Module
24 VDC 24 VDC
Motherboard

Figure 3-1. Overall Block Diagram, Single-Loop System

Display
Module
Central
Control
Module Receiver/
Power/Comm
Transmitter Line RCU's
24 VDC Module
(Field Devices)
I/O Bus (RX/TX)
AC Line Up to 8 RX/TX
Power RX/TX CCM
RX/TX CCM
Modules
Comm
Battery Supply I/O Bus
Comm
Backup
24 VDC Multi-Loop I/O 24 VDC Optional
RX/TX 24 VDC Motherboard I/O Bus I/O Module
24 VDC

Figure 3-2. Overall Block Diagram, Multi-Loop System

76-100016-001 3-1 August 1999

PEGAsys Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System

Internal diagnostics enhance the troubleshooting ability of the

3-3 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTIONS system, examples: microprocessor failure, memory failure, RS-
232 port troubles, etc..
The functional descriptions will describe each device or mod-
ule depicted in Figures 3-1 and 3-2. Two individually programmable signal output circuits (MP1 &
MP2) provided can be used for signaling devices (horns, strobes,
3-3.1 Central Control Module bells) and allow up to 2.0 amps of 24 VDC power. One of the
two outputs is programmed for releasing solenoid type suppres-
The Central Control Module (CCM) is available in two versions, sion equipment (Agent and Sprinkler type systems).
P/N 76-100008-501 for single-loop and P/N 76-100008-600 for
multi-loop. Figure 3-3 contains the main central processing unit, Two individually programmable relay outputs (MP3 & MP4) are
real time clock, watch dog timer and RS-232 serial communica- provided on the CCM for controlling building functions during
tion input/output ports. The CCM controls the operation and alarm occurrences. These relay outputs are activated through
supervision of all the system modules and software within the the EOC programming which allows system inputs to be re-
PEGAsys system. It receives loop device data from the RX/TX lated to system outputs. Each of these relays have Form C style,
module, processes the data based on pre-programmed instruc- rated at 1A, 30VDC.
tions and transmits output commands to the output modules,
One non programmable trouble relay is supplied which is nor-
field devices and display module(s).
mally powered (24 VDC) and will transfer on any system trouble,
The CCM provides two RS-232C serial ports for programming supervisory, pre-alarm and complete power off condition. Form
and monitoring the PEGAsys system. These ports accept 6- C contact rating 1A at 30VDC. Refer to DWG. No. 06-235443-
wire RJ-12 modular connectors. The PCS program would be 001 in Appendix I for further installation details.
used to interface to the system for programming purposes. A
An event history buffer is provided on the CCM which will store
multilevel password scheme protects the system from unau-
1024 entries for single-loop and 6100 entries for multi-loop of
thorized access.
system event information and allow the operator to retrieve this
The real time clock provides the CCM with the ability to display information for review of system operation. The PCS program
the current time & date on the system LCD and control the sys- provides the ability to download, store and print all or a portions
tem with time based programming. of the Event History Buffer.

See Note 1
Note 1: The trouble relay
SOUNDER 1 SOUNDER 2 VOLT FREE RELAYS V/F RELAY
REP 1

REP 2

A B A B 1 2 FAULT
- + - + - + - + NO NC C NO NC C NO NC C

contacts are shown in the

TB4 TB5 TB1 TB2 TB3
unpowered state.
Note 2: Jumpers JP1-JP4 are
used to configure MP01 to be
signaling or releasing (default)
outputs. Refer to Dwg. No.
See Note 2
CCM Reset 06-235443-001, in Appendix I,
Button
JP4 JP3 for further details.
JP1
SW1

JP2
PORT

JK5
I/O

To I/O Modules and

BT1
Power Supplies
RX/TX
PORT

JK2 JK3 JK4

PLG2
To RX/TX
JK1
TB6
1

Loop Controller
SUPPLY
EARTH

24V 5V 0V
FLT

DISP PRINT P.C.

FLT

5V 0V
24V
0V

PORT PORT PORT PLG1 DISPLAY

To External To Remote PC For

Printer Programing
24VDC From
Power Supply
Proc.
Port Display Reset
SW1
PLG2

PLG6

PLG3

Display 24VDC From

Port Power Supply
PLG1

PLG2
JK1

JK2

JK3

TB6

Figure 3-3. Central Control Module, Details

August 1999 3-2 76-100016-001

Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
3-3.2 Receiver/Transmitter Module (RX/TX)
The RX/TX functions as the hardware & software interface be-
tween the loop devices and the CCM. Each installed RX/TX
module continually monitors all addressable devices for alarm
and trouble conditions. Each device is capable of initiating and
sending alarm and trouble messages to the RX/TX module to
which it is connected.
PEGAsys
The RX/TX receives control requests from the CCM and estab-
lishes communications with the loop devices. The RX/TX re-
ceives status changes from the loop devices and reports these
changes to the CCM. The RX/TX shown in Figure 3-4 is ca-
pable of communicating with up to 255 intelligent devices and
complies with the Signaling Line Circuit (SLC) requirements of
NFPA-72 Style 4, 6 & 7. Style 4 initiation circuit wiring will per-
mit T tapping or branch circuitry. Style 7 requires the use of
optional loop isolator devices.

STYLE 6 Signal Line Circuit, with Loop Isolator

Zone 2
Loop Loop
Isolator Isolator

Zone 1 Zone 3

See Note

Loop Loop
76-100005-001

Isolator Isolator
RX/TX

1 2 3 4

RET

RET
24V

24V
LOOP ISOLATOR
Mounted to RX/TX
CPU Reset 74-200012-001
PC Line Normal
Loop Isolator RX/TX
CPU Reset for Style 7
(74-200012-001) Note: Each zone can consist of 30 loop devices
between loop isolators
PC Line Reset
STYLE 7 Signal Line Circuit

Loop Loop
Isolator Isolator
See Note
Zone 2
Loop Loop
Isolator Isolator
Note: Refer to jumper table on Dwg. 06-235371-002 in appendix I

STYLE 6 Signal Line Circuit

Zone 1 Zone 3
1 See Note
2
3
4 Loop Loop
Isolator Isolator
STYLE 4 Signal Line Circuit

1 1 2 3 4
RET

RET
24V

24V

2
LOOP ISOLATOR
3 Mounted to RX/TX
74-200012-001
4
RX/TX
NOTE: Adjacent loop isolators must be within 20ft. Of a device with wiring in conduit
to be in accordance with NFPA Style 7 requirements.

Figure 3-4. Receiver/Transmitter Module, Details

76-100016-001 3-3 August 1999

PEGAsys
3-3.3 Power Supply/Charger Assembly, Rev. A
This power supply assembly was provided with earlier systems.
Information is being provided for service purposes only. The
power supply/charger assembly, Figure 3-5 (P/N 76-100009-
001) is comprised of a printed circuit board (PCB) mounted on
a AC / DC switching power module. The switching power pro-
vides 4 amps of 24 VDC power from the 120 / 240 VAC input
power. The PCB assembly is a microprocessor based unit which
provides the system with
Battery charging (up to 33 AH) and supervision Low Volt-
age Battery cutoff at 19VDC
AC power supervision
24 VDC supervision
Battery load test
24 VDC ground fault detection (+/-)
Trouble relay that transfers upon any power supply trouble
or power off condition (Relay shown in the unpowered state)
Auxiliary 24 VDC outputs (programmable for switched or
unswitched configurations)
The auxiliary 24 VDC outputs rated at 1 Amp each and can be
used to power 4 wire type detection devices such as smoke,
flame and gas detectors which must be sized properly to stay
within output current limits.
Figure 3-5. Obsolete Power Supply/Charger Assembly (Revision A), Details
August 1999
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
The power supply/charger assembly is addressable and com-
municates with the CCM over the I/O bus.
The power supply/charger assembly provides terminal connec-
tions for an auxiliary power module. This module comes with 2
different wiring harnesses, as follows:
P/N 76-100009-002 is supplied with a 36" harness that is
meant to connect a main power supply/charger assembly
to the auxiliary power module in the main cabinet.
P/N 76-100009-003 is supplied with an 8" harness to mount
a main power supply/charger assembly to an auxiliary power
module in a expansion enclosure.
The addition of an auxiliary power module to the main power
supply/charger assembly will provide an additional 4 amps of
current and make the total available current of 8 amps for this
assembly. The system can support up to 8 main power supply/
charger assemblies with the capability of adding an auxiliary
power module to each one to provide a maximum available cur-
rent of 64 amps. Each additional power supply/charger assem-
bly (P/N 76-100009-001) would need to have a separate address
to operate in the system. The auxiliary power module would
share the same address as the main power supply/charger as-
sembly that it is connected to. Refer to drawing number 06-
235443-003, in Appendix I, for further installation details.
3-4 76-100016-001
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
3-3.4 Power Supply/Charger Assembly, Rev. C.
Battery charging (up to 99 AH) and supervision
Low Voltage Battery cutoff at 19VDC
AC power supervision
24 VDC supervision
Battery load test
2 auxiliary 24 VDC outputs, programmable for switched or
unswitched configuration
Trouble relay that transfers upon any power supply trouble
or power off condition (Relay shown in the unpowered state)
The power supply/charger assembly (P/N 76-100009-010) pro-
vides terminal connections for an auxiliary power module. This
module is available with two different wiring harnesses, which
follow:
P/N 76-100009-002 is supplied with a 36" harness that is
meant to connect a main power supply/charger assembly
to the auxiliary power module in the main cabinet.
Figure 3-6. Power Supply/Charger Assembly (Revision C), Details
76-100016-001
PEGAsys
P/N 76-100009-003 is supplied with an 8" harness to mount
a main power supply/charger assembly to an auxiliary power
module in a expansion enclosure.
The addition of an auxiliary power module to the main power
supply/charger assembly will provide an additional 4 amps of
current and make the total available current of 8 amps for this
assembly. The system can support up to 8 main power supply/
charger assemblies with the capability of adding an auxiliary
power module to each one to provide a maximum available cur-
rent of 64 amps. Each additional power supply/charger assem-
bly (P/N 76-100009-010) would need to have a separate address
to operate in the system. The auxiliary power module would
share the same address as the main power supply/charger as-
sembly that it is connected to. Refer to drawing number 06-
235443-003, in Appendix I, for further installation details.
NOTE: The Rev. C. Power Supply/Charger assembly can be
distinguished from the Rev. A. version by the large heat
sink on the right side of the unit.
CAUTION: THE VOLTAGE FOR THE TWO BATTERIES IN SERIES MUST
BE GREATER THAN 22 VDC BEFORE CONNECTION TO THE PANEL.
TWO (2) SEALED
LEAD-ACID
BATTERIES
POWER LIMITED TO 1.5 A DC
POWER LIMITED TO 1.5 A DC
3-5 August 1999
PEGAsys Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System

3-3.5 Multi-Loop I/O Motherboard connection located on the motherboard and the loop number and
addresses assigned to the connected module. Refer to Drawing.
The multi-loop I/O motherboard assembly, P/N 76-100017-001, No. 06-235443-012, in Appendix I, for installation details.
is an assembly which can accept any combination of 9 mod-
ules consisting of up to 8 RX/TX modules and provide connec- Table 3-1. Multi-Loop I/O Motherboard Connectors
tions for up to 7 I/O module circuit board assemblies. The ML
motherboard is mounted to standoffs on the back of the main CONNECTOR LOOP ADDRESS
system enclosure. It distributes the system 24 VDC power, CCM-
RX/TX communications modules and I/O bus communications JP1 1 1001-1255
to the I/O modules. The I/O bus communications are provided
by a RJ-12 (flat phone cable) style connection. A single RJ-12
JP2 2 2001-2255
connection connects the ML motherboard to the CCM for RX/ JP3 3 3001-3255
TX communications. The 24 VDC is provided by the system
power supply via a 2 conductor wiring harness connected to a JP4 4 4001-4255
terminal block (TB9) is distributed through terminal blocks (TB1-
TB8) for connection on RX/TXs. The 24 VDC provided by the JP5 5 5001-5255
system power supply via 2 conductor wiring connected to ter-
minal block TB-11 is distributed through I/O bus slots for power- JP6 6 6001-6255
ing I/O modules.
JP7 7 7001-7255
The RX/TX module communicates to the CCM via the multiplexer
located on the motherboard. The CCM identifies each of the in- JP8 8 8001-8255
stalled RX/TX modules by the RS-232 connection on the
motherboard. The table below lists each RX/TX communication

Figure 3-7. Multi-Loop I/O Motherboard, Details

August 1999 3-6 76-100016-001

Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
3-3.6 Signal Output Module
The PEGAsys panel has the capacity for a maximum of 8 Sig-
nal Output modules, shown in Figure 3-8, thus providing 32 pos-
sible signal circuits. Each Signal Output module is equipped
with supervised 24 VDC outputs which can operate as Style Y
or Style Z indicating circuits. The module will allow for 4 Style
Y or 2 Style Z or a mix of 2 Style Y and 1 Style Z. Each
circuit is supervised for open, short and ground fault. The ability
to isolate individual outputs is accessed through the system
operator menu options.
The alarm output circuits are polarity reversing type, rated for
24 VDC signaling devices up to 2.0 Amp maximum per circuit.
Careful consideration of alarm strobe in-rush currents has been
made to help avoid any potential problems with the increased
power requirements in support of the wide range of the ADA /
UL 1971 signaling appliances in the marketplace. Refer to draw-
ing number 06-235443-006 for installation details.
PEGAsys
Power for normal standby and alarm operation derives from ei-
ther of two sources; 1) primary supply up to its capacity, or 2)
auxiliary power supply input. Provision for hardwire input of aux-
iliary power has been made through the use of hardwire con-
nections between the auxiliary power supply and terminals 1 &
2 of the terminal block of the signal module. Output circuits are
listed for use in power limited applications.
Each circuit can be individually programmed via the PCS pro-
gram for Continuous, Pulsed 60 or 120 BPM (March-Time) or
Coded (Temporal Pattern) operation. Relation between each
signal output and its input source shall be defined by the panel
EOC logic program. In Walk Test mode the signal output circuit(s)
shall sound the test signal if programmed properly. The walk
test signal will be a 1.0 second pulse, then off until the next
device is activated.

2 STYLE "Z"
5
-
CIRCUIT 1
6
-
10K EOR
7
+
8
+
9
-

{
Reset Switch Module Address 10
CIRCUIT 3
Trouble LED Assignment -
10K EOR
11
76-100003-001
SIGNAL AUD

+
12
+

See Note 2

Auxiliary Power
{ 1 STYLE "Z" AND 2 STYLE "Y"
5
NotUsed -
CIRCUIT 1
TB1 6
-
10K EOR
7
Sounder Circuits 1-4 +
8
+
9
-
10
CIRCUIT 3
-
10K EOR 10K EOR CIRCUIT 4
11
+
12
+

Note 1: Refer to DWG. No. 06-235443-006,

in Appendix I, for Configuration
Jumper (W1-W8).
4 STYLE "Y" 2 STYLE "Y" AND 1 STYLE "Z"
5
2: Cut Jumpers W9 & W10 when -
5
-
Auxiliary Power Input is used to CIRCUIT 1 CIRCUIT 1
6 6
remove module from RS-485 10K EOR 10K EOR
-
CIRCUIT 2 10K EOR 10K EOR -
CIRCUIT 2
7
power bus.. +
7
+
8 8
+
3: Only 8 of this Type Module can 9
+
9
be used on the system. Refer - -
CIRCUIT 3 CIRCUIT 3
to Section 1-2.7, in Chapter 1, 10
-
10
-
for other limitations. 10K EOR 10K EOR CIRCUIT 4 10K EOR
11 11
+ +
12 12
+ +

Figure 3-8. Signal Output Module, Details

76-100016-001 3-7 August 1999

PEGAsys Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System

3-3.7 Relay Output Module
The PEGAsys panel has the capacity for a maximum of 8 Aux-
iliary Relay Output cards for up to 32 relays. Each Auxiliary
Relay Output card (shown in Figure 3-9) is equipped with 4
Form C, dry contact relay outputs. The ability to isolate an indi-
vidual relay output is accomplished through the system opera-
tor menu.
76-100004-001
RELAY
The auxiliary relays are rated for 2.0 Amp @ 30 VDC & 1.0 Amp
@ 120 VAC. Refer to Drawing. No. 06-235371-007, in Appen-
dix I, for further installation details.
Each relay output can be individually programmed via the PCS
program for operation. Relation between each relay output and
its input source is defined by the panel EOC logic program. In
Walk Test mode the relay output circuit(s) will not operate when
the input device(s) under test are activated.

Note: A maximum of 8 Relay Output Modules can be used on the system. Refer to paragraph 1-2.7, in Chapter 1, for other limitations.

Figure 3-9. Relay Output Module, Details

August 1999 3-8 76-100016-001

Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System PEGAsys
3-3.8 Agent Release Output Module Table 3-2. Approved Release Output Devices
The PEGAsys panel has the capacity for a maximum of 8 agent
release output modules, which provides up to 8 possible release M anufacturer Solenoids
circuits and 24 maximum signal outputs on these modules.
486500 &
Kidde-Fenwal
Each Agent Release Output card is equipped with a 24V, su- 48650001
pervised output which is programmable for solenoid-type dis-
charge controls. The installer must select discharge control type Kidde-Fenwal 890181
required during software configuration programming. The cir-
cuit shall be supervised for open or ground fault conditions. The Kidde-Fenwal 897494
ability for individual release output isolate is provided through
the system operator menu. Kidde-Fenwal 899175

Each card is equipped with supervised signaling outputs for 3 Kidde-Fenwal 895630
Style Y 24 VDC polarity reversing type indicating circuits. Each
signal circuit is supervised for open, short and ground fault con- FM Groups A, B, D, E, &
ditions. The ability for individual output isolation is provided Various Manufacturers G
through the system operator menu. Careful consideration of Sprinkler Solenoids
alarm strobe in-rush currents has been made.
Power for standby and alarm operation of release and signaling
The agent release output circuit is rated for 24 VDC control outputs shall derive from one of two sources; 1) primary supply up
devices. Each release output can supervise and activate up to to its capacity, or 2) auxiliary power supply input. Input of auxiliary
two (2) solenoid control heads. power is hardwired through terminals 1 & 2 on the modules termi-
Table 3-2 details all devices with which the agent release mod- nal block. Output circuits are Listed for use in Power Limited appli-
ule is approved for operation. cations. All signaling power is fully regulated.

Module Address
Reset Switch
Assignment
Trouble LED
76-100001-001
RELEASE

See Note 2

Auxiliary Power
1 }
Release Circuits

TB1

Signal Circuits

12

Note 1: Only a maximum of 8 of this type module can be used on the system.
Refer to paragraph 1-2.7, in Chapter 1, for other limitations.
2: W1 and W2 must be cut when the auxiliary power input is used.

Figure 3-10. Agent Release Output Module, Details

76-100016-001 3-9 August 1999

PEGAsys Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System

3-3.9 City-Tie Module
The City Notification Card (Figure 3-11) provides connection and
operation for Local Energy, Shunt type Master Box and Reverse
Polarity styles of output. The output type is selected by choosing
which terminals terminate the field wiring. The module has an Am-
ber LED to signify disconnect status. The ability for individual out-
put isolate is provided through the system operator menu.
Local Energy-Type Output: Monitored output for trip circuit wir-
ing and Master Box coil status (Set/Unset), current limited at
550 mA, 24 VDC. Monitored for open, short and ground fault.
Shunt-Type Output: Unsupervised contact rated at 5.0 Amp,
24 VDC resistive.
Reverse Polarity-Type Output: Unsupervised output for trip
circuit wiring only, current limited at 100 mA, 24 VDC.
Reverse Polarity output circuits are listed for use in Power Lim-
ited applications. Refer to Drawing. No. 06-235443-008 for fur-
ther installation details.
The City Tie Module will operate during PEGAsys' FailSoft
mode. Any system alarm will cause the output to transfer.
In Walk Test mode the city notification outputs shall be disabled.
In addition, the output has provisions for manual disable or iso-
late through the operator menu function. The initiation of a walk
test will institute a system trouble causing the city tie output to
transfer to the trouble state.

76-100002-001
CITY TIE

Note: Only 1 City Tie Module can be connected to the system.

Figure 3-11. City Tie Module, Details

August 1999 3-10 76-100016-001

Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
3-3.10 Field Devices
The SmartOne Series of Intelligent Fire Alarm devices provide
the PEGAsys control system with smoke & heat detection, nec-
essary monitoring and control functions required by todays ad-
vanced Fire Alarm systems. Each of the SmartOne devices
features an intrinsic microprocessor with 4K of nonvolatile
memory. Each device constantly monitors its surrounding envi-
ronment and makes decisions in response to that information
then reports status as required to the control panel. Each loop
device communicates with the RX/TX module over the PC
(power/communications) line.
This Distributed Intelligence architecture allows each loop de-
vice to make decisions within the monitored area. This unique
utilization of processing power makes possible a system of loop
devices with greater capacity and flexibility than any typical ad-
dressable device system with centralized processing.
Each SmartOne device contains a status LED which blinks in
various patterns to indicate device status. The blink rates and
associated status levels are as follows:
Blink Rate Operation status
9 Second Rate Normal mode
2 Second Rate Alarm (activated)
Off (not blinking) Trouble condition
The following three paragraphs describe each type of available
detector. A typical detector is shown in Figure 3-12.
3-3.11 SmartOne Ionization Detectors
The SmartOne Ionization smoke detectors provide true distrib-
uted intelligence addressable microprocessor based smoke de-
tection to the PEGAsys system. Model CPD-7052 is a dual
chamber analog ionization type detector which senses both vis-
ible and invisible smoke. A unique sensing chamber permits
360 smoke entry and response. Each detector is electronically
addressable and can be fully field programmed. Calibration, de-
vice address, pre-alarm & alarm sensitivity set points and drift
compensation algorithm are stored in each detectors non vola-
tile memory.
SmartOne Ionization detectors have an unobtrusive low profile
look and are available using the following:
Model CPD 7052 SmartOne Ionization Detector:
P/N 70-402001-100
3-3.12 SmartOne Photoelectric Detectors
The SmartOne Photoelectric smoke detectors provide true dis-
tributed intelligence addressable microprocessor based smoke
detection to the PEGAsys system. Model PSD-7152 is a ana-
log photoelectric type detector which responds to a broad range
of smoldering and flaming type fires. A unique sensing cham-
ber permits 360 smoke entry and response. Each detector is
electronically addressable and can be fully field programmed.
Calibration, device address, pre-alarm & alarm sensitivity set
points and drift compensation algorithm are stored in each
detector's nonvolatile memory.
76-100016-001
PEGAsys
SmartOne photoelectric detectors have an unobtrusive low pro-
file look and are available using the following:
Model PSD 7152 SmartOne Photoelectric Detector:
P/N 71-402001-100
Figure 3-12. Typical Detector
3-3.13 SmartOne Heat Detectors
The SmartOne heat detectors provide true distributed intelli-
gence addressable microprocessor based heat detection to the
PEGAsys system. Model THD-7252 is a analog fixed tempera-
ture thermistor type detector which does not respond to rate of
rise conditions until its programmed set point is met. Unique
algorithms are used to compensate for heat rise without prob-
lems associated with false alarms due to elevated rates of rise
in ambient temperature.
A unique sensing chamber permits 360 heat entry and re-
sponse. Each detector is electronically addressable and can
be fully field programmed. Calibration, device address, pre-alarm
& alarm sensitivity set points and drift compensation algorithm
are stored in each detector's nonvolatile memory.
SmartOne Heat detectors have an unobtrusive low-profile look
and are available using the following:
Model THD 7252 SmartOne Heat Detector:
P/N 70-404001-100
3-3.14 Addressable Contact Input Devices
The PEGASYS Contact Monitor (P/N 70-407008-00X) allows
an installer the ability to interface typical NO/NC fire alarm de-
vices, such as water flow and tamper switches to the PEGAsys
system. The contact monitor is also used to interface to the
Manual Alarm, Manual Release and Abort Stations. The ad-
dressable contact monitor device is programmable to report in
the following manners: Alarm (default), Trouble, Manual Alarm,
Waterflow Alarm, Manual Release, Abort, Supervisory and Nor-
mal (Silent input). Its default setting is alarm when programmed
using the Autolearn function.
The unit includes a connection for an optional status LED which
allows the device to indicate its present operating status. In nor-
mal standby mode the LED will flash every 9 seconds, in trouble
condition the LED will be extinguished, when activated the LED
will flash every 2 seconds.
Addressable Contact Input Device (NO):
P/N 70-407008-001.
Addressable Contact Input Device (NC):
P/N 70-407008-002.
3-11 August 1999
PEGAsys Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System

The duct housing accepts either the PSD-7152 or CPD-7052

smoke detectors. A transparent Lexan cover over the detection
chamber allows visual inspection of the duct detector chamber
and the internal smoke detector status. Sampling of the air in
the duct is accomplished through the use of sampling tubes
which extend into the HVAC duct.
Model DH-2000 Air Duct Housing:
P/N 70-403001-100
Model DH-2000 CPDI Air Duct Housing with Ion Det.:
P/N 70-403001-052
Model DH-2000 PSDI Air Duct Housing with Photo Det.:
P/N 70-403001-152
Refer to DH-2000 Installation manual 74-222 (P/N 06-235398-
001) for further details.

Figure 3-13. Addressable Contact Input Device

3-3.15 Addressable Relay Output Devices

The addressable relay output device (P/N 70-408004-001) pro-
vides the PEGAsys system with a Form C dry contact inter-
face for remote control applications. The device connects directly
to the RX/TX multiplex loop and contains an SPDT relay for
control of auxiliary equipment. The device can be activated
through the systems EOC or RTC programming and its default
operation programming is done during the Autolearn function.
The unit includes an intrinsic status LED which allows the de-
vice to indicate its present operating status. In normal standby
mode the LED will flash every 9 seconds, in trouble condition Figure 3-15. DH-2000 Air Duct Housing
the LED will be extinguished, in activated condition the LED will
flash every 2 seconds.
3-3.17 Loop Isolator Devices
Addressable Relay Output Device:
P/N 70-408004-001 The SmartOne series of loop devices offer optional loop isola-
tion which protects the loop from wire-to-wire short conditions
Form-C contact rated at: N/O 7 (NFPA 72 Style 7). The isolators will open the loop between two
0.6 A @ 120 VAC
2.0 A @ 30 VDC (resistive)
COM
6 Field isolators in the presence of a short circuit condition, thus allow-
Connections
1.0 A @ 30 VDC (inductive) N/C 5 ing the remainder of the loop to operate normally, however, a
trouble indication for the devices effected by the isolation will
be prompted on the panel. The isolators will return to normal
(+) (+)
PC Line
operation when the short condition has been removed from the
PC Line (-)
In
(-) Out effected wires.
The loop isolators are offered in three package styles, one stand
alone style in a single gang electrical box arrangement, a sec-
7 6 5 4 3 2
(+) (-) (+) (-)
1
ond in a detector base module arrangement which allows the
unit to be mounted behind a smoke detector in the 6 detector
N/O COM N/C
PC PC PC PC
TERMINALS 5-7 ARE POWER LIMITED
TERMINALS 1-4 ARE POWER LIMITED
MAX. INSTALL. TEMP. 120F

DATE OF MANUFACTURE:

base and a third which mounts directly on the RX/TX module.

TM

FOR SERVICE SEND TO:

KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.
CAT. NO. 70-408004-001

ASHLAND, MA 01721
SmartOne

INSTRUCTIONS
SEE INSTALLATION
MODEL AO

06-235577-001

400 MAIN ST.

The single gang mount unit includes intrinsic status LEDs which
allows the device to indicate in which direction the short condi-
tion is being detected. In normal standby mode the LED will be
Figure 3-14. Addressable Relay Output Device extinguished, in activated condition the LED will be on continu-
ously.
3-3.16 Model DH-2000 Air Duct Housing Loop Isolator RX/TX mount:
P/N 74-200012-001
The DH-2000 air duct housing is designed for detecting par-
ticles of combustion in air handling systems. Upon smoke de- Loop Isolator Stand-alone (Single Gang):
tection the system can be programmed to control a variety of P/N 74-200012-002
devices like HVAC fans and power shut down preventing un- Loop Isolator 6 detector base mount:
necessary damage to the facility. P/N 74-200012-004

August 1999 3-12 76-100016-001

Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System PEGAsys

Figure 3-18. Loop Isolator, 6" Detector Base Mount

Figure 3-16. Loop Isolator, RX/TX Mount

Figure 3-17. Loop Isolator, Stand-Alone

76-100016-001 3-13 August 1999

PEGAsys Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System

(THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK)

August 1999 3-14 76-100016-001

Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System PEGAsys

CHAPTER 4
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE

is operating as intended. The test actually stimulates the detec-

4-1 INTRODUCTION. tion chamber of the device and verifies the response from the
device. The CCM will report a result of the test for each device
This chapter contains maintenance instructions for the PEGAsys. tested.
These procedures should be accomplished on a scheduled ba-
sis. In the event that system problems are found during the per- NOTE: This test has a pass or fail result. It will not activate
formance of a procedure, refer to Chapter 5 for corrective action. alarm outputs on the system.
The step-by-step procedure to perform the loop device test fol-
lows:
4-2 SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE. NOTE: Addressable Contact Input Modules cannot be tested
with this procedure. This is for SmartOne smoke and
The scheduled maintenance of the system should be performed heat detectors only.
at an established interval. The interval that the maintenance
procedures are performed should not exceed any imposed regu- a. Access the PEGAsys system menus by:
lations (NFPA 72 or local codes). (1) Press 0 (zero) key. Verify that the display reads:
PLEASE ENTER PASSWORD
(2) Type in the Level 1 or Level 2 password.
(3) Press the return () key. Verify that the display reads:
4-3 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES.
1:ISOLATE 2:LIST
The following paragraphs outline general scheduled mainte- 3:SET 4:TEST
nance procedures to be performed on an as-necessary basis.
b. Press number 4 push-button, verify that the display reads:
4-3.1 Lamp Test 1:LAMP TEST 2:LOOP DEVICES
This test allows the user to check the system display LEDs.
3:BATTERY TEST SCROLL for more
The step-by-step procedure to perform the lamp test follows: c. Press number 2 push-button, verify that the display reads:
a. Access the PEGAsys system menus by: START DEVICE TEST
(1) Press 0 (zero) key. Verify that the display reads: TEST DEVICES FROM _ _ _ _TO_ _ _ _
PLEASE ENTER PASSWORD d. Enter the device address to be tested and then press the
(2) Type in the Level 1 or Level 2 password. return push-button.
(3) Press the return () key. Verify that the display reads: e. Verify the display scrolls through each selected address
1:ISOLATE 2:LIST and read as below:
3:SET 4:TEST START DEVICE TEST
b. Press number 4 push-button, verify that the display reads: TESTING (Device Address #)
1:LAMP TEST 2:LOOP DEVICES f. When the device testing is completed the display will read:
3:BATTERY TEST SCROLL for more TEST COMPLETED
c. Press number 1 push-button, verify that the display reads: (Address #) TEST (PASSED or FAILED)
***LAMP TEST*** g. Press the SCROLL push-button to read the status of each
***VERSION 1.0*** device tested.

d. Ensure the following LEDs are momentarily lit: 4-3.3 Battery Test
POWER ON ALARM This test allows the user to activate a battery test to verify bat-
TROUBLE SUPERVISORY tery capacity. The step-by-step procedure to perform the bat-
GROUND FAULT PREALARM tery test follows:
CPU ERROR SILENCE a. Access the PEGAsys system menus by:
(1) Press 0 (zero) key. Verify that the display reads:
4-3.2 Loop Device Test
PLEASE ENTER PASSWORD
The PEGAsys system provides a unique detector test function
(2) Type in the Level 1 or Level 2 password.
which allows a user to initiate a test of a detection device through
(3) Press the return () key. Verify that the display reads:
the use of the system menus and verify the detection device(s)
1:ISOLATE 2:LIST
3:SET 4:TEST

76-100016-001 4-1 August 1999

PEGAsys
b. Press number 4 push-button, verify that the display reads:
1:LAMP TEST 2:LOOP DEVICES
3:BATTERY TEST SCROLL for more
c. Press number 3 push-button, verify that the display reads:
BATTERY TEST
BATTERY TEST ON PS*_ _
d. Enter the power supply address which the batteries are
connected to. Verify the display reads:
BATTERY TEST
TEST ACTIVATED ON PS(_ _)
e. Upon the completion of the test the display will read:
TEST ON PS(_ _) COMPLETED
>_>_ _._V
f. Verify that the voltage is within allowable tolerances.
4-3.4 Walk Test
The PEGAsys system provides a one person walk test func-
tion. This allows the service person to enable a group of de-
vices for walk test, then proceed through the installation
activating the specified devices. The system will respond to each
activation with a short burst of the programmed signal circuit.
The related signal circuit will only be pulsed if it has been con-
figured for the Walk Test feature when defining it in the PCS
software.
During the system installation/configuration operation the in-
staller would need to enable each signal circuit installed in the
system for Walk Test, if desired. The systems signal outputs
default to walk test disabled. When walk test is activated and
carried out the system enters each activation with a time and
date stamp. The operator can then print out all walk test results
for review.
The walk test feature can be deactivated two ways, the service
person can deactivate it through the user menus or the walk
test function will time out after 10 minutes of non activation en-
suring system response if the service person is called away for
an extended period of time.
NOTE: When the walk test is active the panel will annunciate
a trouble condition.
4-3.4.1 WALK TESTING DETECTORS
Place the system in walk test as described in Paragraph 4-3.4.2.
To place a detector into alarm perform the applicable proce-
dure below:
Smoke Detectors:
When testing SmartOne smoke detectors use a "punk-stick" or
"cotton wick" to generate smoke. Apply smoke to the detector
for a minimum of 10 seconds. When a sufficient amount of
smoke has entered the device, the control panel will respond
with an alarm indication. The status LED of the detector will
flash at a 2 second rate during the alarm period. Use of aerosol
smoke simulation product may be used if acceptable to the
Authority having Jurisdiction and if the product is used as di-
rected in the instructions.
August 1999
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
Heat Detectors:
When testing SmartOne heat detectors use of a low powered
heat gun is acceptable. Heat the detector for a minimum of ten
seconds. When a sufficient amount of heat has been detected
by the detector, the control panel will respond with an alarm
indication. The status LED of the detector will flash at a 2 sec-
ond rate during the alarm period. Take care during the heating
of the detector to avoid over heating the plastic housing. Main-
tain a minimum of 1 foot between the detector and the heat gun
nozzle. Use of open flame devices are not recommended as
discoloration of the plastic housing is likely and this is a poten-
tially hazardous practice.
4-3.4.2 WALK TEST PROCEDURE
The step-by-step procedure to perform the walk test follows:
a. Access the PEGAsys system menus by:
(1) Press 0 (zero) key. Verify that the display reads:
PLEASE ENTER PASSWORD
(2) Type in the Level-2 password.
(3) Press the return () key. Verify that the display reads:
1:ISOLATE 2:LIST
3:SET 4:TEST
b. Press number 4 push-button, verify that the display reads:
1:LAMP TEST 2:LOOP DEVICES
3:BATTERY TEST SCROLL for more
c. Press the SCROLL push-button, verify that the display
reads:
4:WALK TEST 5:ALARM SIM TEST
d. Press number 4 push-button, verify that the display reads:
1:START WALK TEST 5:STOP WALK TEST
e. Press number 1 push-button, verify that the display reads:
START DEVICE WALK TEST
WALK TEST STARTED ON LOOP( _ _)
f. After completion of the walk test, press number 2 push-
button to disable the walk test mode.
4-3.5 Alarm Simulation Test (AST)
The PEGAsys system provides a feature which allows the sys-
tem installer/inspector to verify the actual output operation in
relation to the input(s) which are programmed to activate the
output of interest. The service person would enable the AST
function for a particular input and the system would operate the
output(s) as it is programmed in the Event Output Control pro-
gram. The system will respond with an alarm condition when
the AST feature is enabled. The user would have to disable the
AST when output operation has been verified.
WARNING
Any outputs which are controlling critical pro-
cesses or agent releasing should be physically dis-
connected from the process or agent container to
avoid unwanted shutdowns and/or agent releases.
When the AST function is enabled the pre- pro-
grammed outputs for the activated input(s) will
activate.
4-2 76-100016-001
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System PEGAsys
4-3.5.1 AST PROCEDURE 4. "Testing shall include verification that the releasing circuits
and components energized or actuated by the fire alarm
The step-by-step procedure to perform the AST follows:
system are electrically supervised and operate as intended
a. Be sure to observe the above warning. on alarm."
b. Access the PEGAsys system menus by: 5. "Suppression systems and releasing components shall be
(1) Press 0 (zero) key. Verify that the display reads: returned to their normal condition upon completion of sys-
PLEASE ENTER PASSWORD tem testing."

(2) Type in the Level-2 password. 4-4.1 Disarming Release Circuits

(3) Press the return () key. Verify that the display reads:
Perform the following step-by-step procedure prior to system
1:ISOLATE 2:LIST
testing.
3:SET 4:TEST
a. Isolate all agent release circuits using the system menu
c. Press number 4 push-button, verify that the display reads: (Refer to Paragraph 2-5.4.1).
1:LAMP TEST 2:LOOP DEVICES WARNING
3:BATTERY TEST SCROLL for more
Use safety precautions when removing solenoids
d. Press the SCROLL push-button, verify that the display and connections from initiators (i.e. use the short-
reads: ing cap when the initiators are disconnected) to
4:WALK TEST 5:ALARM SIM TEST prevent unwanted discharge or activation.
e. Press number 5 push-button, verify that the display reads: b. Physically remove the solenoids at the storage containers.
WARNING
ALARM SIMULATION TEST
DETECTOR ADDRESS _ _ _ _ The suppression system is now fully disarmed from
all automatic activation and, in some cases, all
f. Type in the selected device address and then press the manual activation.
return push-button. Verify that the display reads:
c. The system can now be tested without the risk of an inad-
ALARM SIMULATION TEST vertent release of agent.
1:ACTIVATE 2:DE-ACTIVATE
g. Press number 1 push-button and then the return push-but- 4-4.2 Arming Release Circuits
ton. Verify that the system responds as programed. Perform the following step-by-step procedure upon completion
h. Press the ACKLDGE push-button to acknowledge the of system testing.
alarm.
a. Verify that all solenoids are disconnected from storage con-
i. De-activate the AST programming by: tainers.
(1) Repeat steps b. through f. b. Isolate all agent release circuits using the system menu
(2) Press number 2 push-button and then return (). (Refer to Paragraph 2-5.4.1).
c. Reconnect the solenoids at the storage containers.
4-4 DISARMING AND REARMING RELEASE d. Ensure the system is free of any alarms to prevent unwanted
discharge or activation.
CIRCUITS
e. De-isolate agent release circuit(s).
The disarming and rearming procedures which follow must be
f. The system is now in full operation in accordance with sys-
performed when testing the PEGAsys system. Prior to preced-
tem programming.
ing ensure the notes below from NFPA 72 Chapter 7 are under-
stood.
IMPORTANT NOTES
4-5 POWERING DOWN THE SYSTEM
1. "Testing personnel shall be familiar with the specific arrange-
ment and operation of the suppression system(s) and re-
leasing function(s) and cognizant of the hazards associated 4-5.1 Power-Down Procedure
with inadvertent system discharge." The step-by-step procedure to power-down the system follows:
2. "Occupant notification shall be required whenever a fire a. Ensure that the panel does not have any active alarms to
alarm system configured for releasing service is being ser- prevent unwanted discharge or activation.
viced or tested."
CAUTION
3. "Discharge testing of suppression systems shall not be re-
quired by this code. Suppression systems shall be secured If alarms do exist during power-down, power-up of
from inadvertent actuation, including disconnection of re- the panel will cause a reactivation of the alarm se-
leasing solenoids/electric actuators, closing of valves, other quence and possible activation of the suppression
actions, or combinations thereof, as appropriate for the system.
specific system, for the duration of the fire system testing."
b. Disarm release circuits as per Paragraph 4-4.1.

76-100016-001 4-3 August 1999

PEGAsys Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System

c. Remove DC power by disconnecting batteries first. SYSTEM TIME (AM/PM)

d. Remove AC power by shutting off the circuit breaker to the 1:AM 2:PM
panel, second.
(d) Type in appropriate selection (1 for AM or 2 for
PM).
c. Rearm release circuit per Paragraph 4-4.2.
4-6 POWERING UP THE SYSTEM

4-6.1 Power-Up Procedure

a. Ensure that all solenoids are disconnected from the stor-
age containers to prevent unwanted discharge or activa-
tion.
b. If the system has been powered down energize the system
by performing the following steps:
(1) Set the circuit breaker for the CCP power to ON. Verify
that the display reads "Main Processor Power On" and
that the CPU ERROR indicator is lit. Ensure that the
audible device is buzzing continuously.
(2) Press the display module reset switch. Verify that the
CPU ERROR indicator is extinguished and the audible
device is silenced.
(3) Verify that the display reads as follows:
MAIN PROCESSOR
POWER ON
(4) After ten seconds, verify that the display reads as fol-
lows:
RXTX NON-MONITORING TROUBLE ON
RXTX1
NOTE: The RX/TX message will repeat itself for each RX/TX
module in the system while the system initializes itself.
This initialization can take up to 90 seconds.
(5) Verify that the POWER ON and TROUBLE indicators
are lit.
(6) Connect the backup batteries to the CCP in accordance
to the procedure in Chapter 7.
(7) Press the ACKLDGE push-button. After approximately
one minute the display will momentarily read:
RXTX NON-MONITORING TROUBLE OFF
(8) Verify the display reads the correct time and date. If
the incorrect time is displayed perform step a.9.
(9) Set time and date as follows:
(a) Press 0 (zero) key. Verify that the display reads:
PLEASE ENTER PASSWORD
(b) Type in the default 1st level password (987).
(c) Press the return () key. Verify that the display
reads:
1:ISOLATE 2:LIST
3:SET 4:TEST
(d) Type in 3111 on the keypad. Verify that the dis-
play reads:
SYSTEM TIME (AM/PM)
ENTER THE TIME _ _ : _ _ (HH:MM)
(e) Type in the time (HH=hours 0-12 and then
MM=minutes 0-59). Press the return key. Verify
that the display reads:

August 1999 4-4 76-100016-001

Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System PEGAsys

CHAPTER 5
TROUBLESHOOTING AND CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE

5-1 INTRODUCTION 5-3 TROUBLESHOOTING

The effectiveness of this chapter is greatly increased by first The PEGAsys system utilizes internal programming for con-
reading the entire manual. The service technician must have a tinuous system testing. Most system faults can be isolated
sure understanding of the purpose and correct function of the through the operation of the front panel. Users/technicians
module/device before attempting corrective maintenance. This can initiate various testing via the use of the system menu
chapter contains instructions to aid a technician in locating faulty (See Paragraph 2-5) after entering a valid password.
modules/devices.
Table 5-1. Troubleshooting Index
This chapter also provides instructions for the removal and re-
placement of the replaceable modules/devices of the PEGAsys Functional
system. Detailed Replacement
Module/Device Description
Illustration Procedure
WARNING Paragraph

All service to panel must be done with panel pow- Central Control
ered down to prevent damage to panel compo- 3-3 3-3.1 5-4.2
Module
nents, personnel injury, or both
Receiver/Transmitt-
3-4 3-3.2 5-4.3
er Module RXTX

5-2 STANDARD FAULT-ISOLATION TECHNIQUES Power Supply

3-5 & 3-6 3-3.3 & 3-3.4
7-7.6, 7-7.7 &
Module 7-7.8
Failure of the PEGAsys system to function properly will usually
be caused by one or more of the following faults: Multi-Loop
3-7 3-3.5
a. Failure of the Power Supply Motherboard
b. Burned Out Indicator Basic I/O
c. Damaged Wiring or Corrosion 1-6 1-2.5 7-5
Motherboard
e. Component Failure
Signal Output
When a failure occurs and the cause is not known, check as Module
3-8 3-3.6 7-7.1
many of these items as is practical before starting a detailed
check. If possible, obtain information about any changes taking Relay Output
place that may affect the system. 3-9 3-3.7 7-7.2
Module

5-2.1 Visual Inspection Agent Release

3-10 3-3.8 7-7.3
Module
When troubleshooting, the fault may often be discovered through
visual inspection alone. Some faults, such as burned out indi-
City Tie Module 3-11 3-3.9 7-7.4
cators, shorted transformers, or wiring, can be located by sight
or smell. Check for smoke or the odor of burned or overheated
parts. Look for loose connections. Visual inspection is also use- Field Device -- 3-3.8 5-4.4
ful in avoiding damage to the system which could occur through
improper servicing methods. Refer to Table 5-1, Troubleshoot- Addressable
ing Index, and the paragraphs of this chapter for troubleshoot- Contact Input 3-11 3-3.12 5-4.4
ing beyond visual inspection. Device

Addessable Relay
5-2.2 Power Checks 3-12 3-3.13 5-5.4
Output Device
Many faults on the system can be caused by problems with
power. Ensure battery and line voltages are checked prior to Air Duct Housing 3-13 3-3.14 See Manual
troubleshooting the system.
3-14 thru 3-
Loop Isolators 3-3.15
16

76-100016-001 5-1 August 1999

PEGAsys Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System

5-4 REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT a. Disconnect plug from terminal T1.

The following paragraphs provide required tools and step-by-step b.
replacement procedures for the PEGAsys. The procedures
should also be used to assist module and device installation. c.
CAUTION d.
e.
Some components are subject to damage from
electrostatic discharge (ESD). These components
are not to be removed from their protective wrap- f.
pings until they are to be installed in their respec- g.
tive equipment locations, and then only by
personnel connected to earth ground.
Remove the two mounting screws from the module and move
module to gain access to connected wiring.
Remove the plug from the RS-232 port.
Remove power plug from connector jack J1.
Remove new RX/TX module from packing and inspect for
physical damage.
Ensure jumper configuration is set.
Install new RX/TX in the reverse order of removal.

5-4.1 Required Tools

The following tools will be required to perform the removal and
replacement procedures.
a. Small Flat-Blade Screwdriver
b. 6" Flat-Blade Screwdriver
c. No. 2 Philips Screwdriver
d. Wire Striper
e. Small Needle Nose Pliers
f. Ground strap

5-4.2 Central Control Module

The following paragraph provides the step-by-step procedure for
replacing the CCM.
a. Ensure all programming is saved using PCS software.
b. Disconnect plugs from the I/O Port and RX/TX port, and PC Figure 5-1. Installation for Single Loop
port (if connected to IIM)
c. Remove the wiring from TB6.
d. Remove the six mounting screws while holding the CCM in
place.
e. Remove CCM from cabinet.
f. Remove new CCM from packing and inspect for physical
damage.
g. Install new CCM in the reverse order of removal.

5-4.3 RX/TX Module

The following paragraph provides the step-by-step procedure
for replacing the RX/TX module. Depending on the system con-
figuration refer to the appropriate Figure, 5-1 or 5-2.
Ensure that the RX/TX jumpers are set properly during the pro-
cedure. Verify that the settings of the jumpers on the RX/TX
Module conform to the wiring style of the system being installed.
The RX/TX is shipped from the factory programmed for Style 6
wiring style. Refer to drawing 06-235443-002, in Appendix I, the
installation drawing which shows the jumper locations on the
RX/TX module. The settings are used to set the wiring style ( 4, 6
or 7), with 7 being used with loop isolators. Jumpers on the RX/TX Figure 5-2. Installation for Multi-Loop
Module are noted by JP x and Wx (x = a single digit) call-outs on
the module board. Table 5-2 lists the types of allowable configura-
tions you can select along with their respective jumpers.

August 1999 5-2 76-100016-001

Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System PEGAsys
Table 5-2. RX/TX Configuration Selection

Style 6
Jumper Style 4 Style 6 W/Loop Style 7
Isolator

W1 & W2 Open Shorted Shorted Shorted

JP 2 Shorted Shorted Open Open

JP 3 Shorted Shorted Open Open

NOTE: Style-7 requires the use of loop isolators, the RX/TX

module requires the use of one (1) P/N 74-200012-
001 isolator module to operate in the Style-7
configuration.

5-4.4 Field Devices

The following paragraph provides the step-by-step procedure
to replace field devices into the PEGAsys system.
NOTE: Smoke and heat detectors can be replaced without
powering down the system. If adding new loop devices
to the system, then the panel will need to be powered
down.
NOTE: If device is in alarm, the alarm must be cleared prior to
removal from the system. If the alarm cannot be cleared,
remove the device from the system and push the hard
reset on the CCM motherboard and RX/TX. Once the
system is on-line insert the replacement device onto
the loop.
a. Identify the defective device to be replaced.
b. Remove the defective device from the PC Line.
c. Record the Model Number and Device Type.
d. Ensure the new device is an exact replacement. Verify that
the Model Number is the same as the defective device.
e. Set the address of the new device to the same as the de-
fective device using the procedure in Paragraph 2-8.6.
f. Connect the new device to the PC Line where the defec-
tive device was removed, if not accomplished in the previ-
ous step. Use the same detector base or electrical box of
the defective device.
g. Perform the appropriate test listed below:
Loop Device Test (Paragraph 4-3.2) for Detection De-
vices.
Walk Test (Paragraph 4-3.4.2) for AI or AO.

76-100016-001 5-3 August 1999

PEGAsys Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System

(THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK)

August 1999 5-4 76-100016-001

Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System PEGAsys

CHAPTER 6
PARTS LIST

6-1 INTRODUCTION
The PEGAsys system parts list, Table 6-1 provides a list of all
repair parts.

Table 6-1. PEGAsys System Parts List

NOMENCLATURE PART NUMBER

SYSTEMS
PEGAsys Control Unit (includes CCM with One RX/TX Module, One Power Supply/ 76-100000-501
Charger Assembly and Enclosure)
PEGAsys Multi-Loop Control Unit (includes CCM with One Multi-Loop 76-100000-600
Motherboard One RX/TX Module, One P.S./Charger Assembly and Enclosure)
MAIN SYSTEM COMPONENTS
Central Control Module (CCM), Single-loop 76-100008-501
Central Control Module (CCM), Multi-loop 76-100008-600
Power Supply/Charger Assembly, includes 4 Amp. P.S., Rev. C. 76-100009-010
RX/TX Module for Single Loop System 76-100005-001
RX/TX Module for Multi-Loop System 76-100005-002
Main Enclosure 76-100000-502
INPUT/OUTPUT MODULES
Agent Release Module 76-100001-001
Signal Output Module 76-100003-001
Relay Output Module 76-100004-001
City Tie Module 76-100002-001
I/O Motherboard for 8 Option Modules 76-100007-001
I/O Multi-Loop Motherboard for up to 8 RX/TX or 7 I/O modules 76-100017-001
POWER SUPPLIES
Power Supply Module, 4 Amp., including 36" Wiring Harness (for main cabinet) 76-100009-002
Power Supply Module, 4 Amp., including 8" Wiring Harness (for expansion cabinet) 76-100009-003
ADDITIONAL COMPONENTS
PEGAsys Expansion Enclosure (order backplane separately) 76-100000-505
Expansion Backplane, for Mounting Motherboard and 4 Power Supplies 76-100000-006
Expansion Backplane, for Mounting 8 Power Supplies 76-100000-007
Expansion Backplane, for Mounting two I/O Motherboards 76-100000-008
Battery Enclosure for Additional Batteries 76-100010-001
Battery 12V, 17AH 06-115915-046
Battery 12V, 33AH 89-100052-001

76-100016-001 6-1 August 1999

PEGAsys Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System

Table 6-1. PEGAsys System Parts List (Continued)

NOMENCLATURE PART NUMBER

SMARTONE FIELD DEVICES

Intelligent Photoelectric Detector, Model PSD-7152 71-402001-100
Intelligent Ionization Detector, Model CPD-7052 70-402001-100
Intelligent Thermal Detector, Model THD-7252 70-404001-100
6' Universal Detector Base, Model 6SB 70-400001-100
4' Universal Detector Base, Model 4SB 70-400001-101
Addressable Contact Input Device (N.O.) 70-407008-001
Addressable Contact Input Device (N.C.) 70-407008-002
Addressable Relay Output Device 70-408004-001
Loop Isolator - 1 Gang Box Mounted 74-200012-002
Loop Isolator - Detector Base Mounted 74-200012-004
Loop Isolator - RXTX Mounted 74-200012-001
DUCT HOUSING AND COMPONENTS
DH-2000 Duct Housing without Detector Installed 70-403001-100
DH-2000 PSDI - Duct Housing with Photoelectric Detector Installed 70-403001-152
DH-2000 CPDI - Duct Housing with Ionization Detector Installed 70-403001-052
Sampling Tube - 12", The number of sampling holes vary with tube length. Order 06-129500-001
sampling tubes that approximate duct width.
Sampling Tube - 24" 06-129500-002
Sampling Tube - 48" 06-129500-003
Sampling Tube - 72" 06-129500-004
Sampling Tube - 96" 06-129500-005
Sampling Tube - 120" 06-129500-006
Exhaust Tube Kit 06-129554-001
MISCELLANEOUS
Handheld Device Programmer 74-200013-001
6-Conductor Telephone Cable with DB25 Adapter (DTE) for Computers and 74-100016-001
Terminals
6-Conductor Telephone Cable with DB25 Adapter (DCE) for Modems 74-100016-002
6-Conductor Telephone Cable with DB9 Adapter (DTE) for Laptop Computers 74-100016-003
DB25 Adapter (DTE) for Computers and Terminals (use with 6-Conductor 06-129341-001
Telephone Cable)
DB25 Adapter (DCE) for Modems (use with 6-Conductor Telephone Cable) 06-129317-003
DB9 Adapter (DTE) for Laptop Computer 06-129373-001

August 1999 6-2 76-100016-001

Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System PEGAsys

CHAPTER 7
INSTALLATION

7-1 INTRODUCTION
This chapter provides information necessary to install the PE-
GAsys system. Installation consists of installing a complete sys-
tem. The procedures in this chapter should be accomplished
by technicians familiar with fire alarm system installation and
the requirements of relevant NFPA regulations.

7-2 MATERIALS REQUIRED FOR INSTALLATION

The materials listed below are not supplied with the system, but
are required for installation.
No. 10 or 1/4 inch Mounting Hardware
Electrical Conduit for AC Input Power
4-inch Electrical Junction Boxes (as required)
Wire-Nuts and Crimp-On Terminals (as required)
Ground Strap (for use when handling printed circuit boards

7-3 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FOR CENTRAL
CONTROL PANEL
The PEGAsys Central Control Panel enclosure is 28 inches high
x 18 inches wide x 5 inches deep. It is designed to be surface
or semi-flush mounted using No. 10 or inch hardware. The
type of hardware to be used is at the discretion of the installer
but must be in accordance with good electrical and safety prac-
tices.
Figure 7-1 shows the enclosures mounting hole layout. The
lower set of mounting holes should typically be 44 inches from
the floor in order that the display panel is at a convenient view-
ing height.
To facilitate mounting the enclosure to its wall position, remove
the enclosures front door. Be sure to disconnect the ground
wire before removing the door.
To remove the front door, open the door approximately 90 from
its closed position and lift it up enough to allow the doors hinge
pins to clear their mating hinge sockets located on the left side
of the Central Control Panel.
Place the mounting screws in to the top two holes in the wall.
Leave approximately 1/4 of both screws exposed. Carefully
place the two key holes over the screws in the wall. Ensure the
enclosure has its door hinge sockets located to the left as you
face the enclosure. Allow the enclosure to gently come to rest
on the screws. Tighten the screws.
Figure 7-1. CCP Installation Drawing
With the enclosure held by the top two screws place the bottom
two mounting screws in place. Tighten the screws. Reinstall the
enclosure door at this time. Care must be taken when installing
the door to ensure that the hinge pins are lined up correctly.
7-4 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FOR
EXPANSION ENCLOSURES
The expansion enclosure (P/N 76-100000-505) uses a back
plate installed in the enclosure to meet various system compo-
nent requirements. The expansion enclosure maintains the
same outside dimensions as the main system enclosure. There
are three versions of the backplate:
An I/O module cardcage with mounting provisions for up to
4 power supplies
Mounting provisions for up to eight power supplies
Two motherboard cardcages for mounting up to 16 I/O mod-
ules in the expansion enclosure.
The optional I/O motherboard and I/O modules must be installed
prior to the system being powered up. The I/O bus (communi-
cations) and 24 VDC power are attached to connectors located
on the I/O Motherboard.
NOTE: The I/O Bus (RS-485) wiring must be enclosed in
raceway from the main enclosure for a maximum run
of 20 feet, with expansion enclosures located in the
same room as the main enclosure.
Figure 7-2, shows the expansion backplate which provides
mounting for 4 power supplies and one I/O motherboard. Fig-

76-100016-001 7-1 August 1999

PEGAsys Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System

ure 7-3 shows the expansion backplate which provides mount-

ing for up to 8 auxiliary power supplies. Figure 7-4, shows the
expansion backplate which provides mounting for two I/O moth-
erboards.
To install, position the back plate in the enclosure and fasten it
to the seven studs located in the enclosure using the nuts sup-
plied with the enclosure.

MOTHER BD CCM RS485 KIDDE-FENWAL, INC. ASHLAND, MA 01721

TBL RELAY
06-129562-001

W2 W3
NO
NC
C
B
A

W4

N
DS1

1
S2

S1

AC OUT
L
N
2
L
1
2

1
2

G
AC IN
N
L

24V
S3

DC IN 1

RET

SHR
RET
AUX 1 AUX 2

24V

RET
R

24V
TB8 TB9
W1

TP3 TP4
RET

RET

24V

SHR
RET

24V

RET

24V

RET

24V

-
+

BAT F1
SYSTEM POWER DC IN 2

MOTHER BD CCM RS485 KIDDE-FENWAL, INC. ASHLAND, MA 01721

TBL RELAY
06-129562-001

W2 W3
NO
NC
C
B
A

W4

N
DS1

1
S2

S1

AC OUT
L
N
2
L
1
2

1
2

G
AC IN
N
L

24V
S3

DC IN 1

RET

SHR
RET
AUX 1 AUX 2

24V

RET
R

24V
TB8 TB9
W1

TP3 TP4
RET

RET

24V

SHR
RET

24V

RET

24V

RET

24V

-
+

BAT F1
SYSTEM POWER DC IN 2

= Back Plate Mounting Studs (7 Locations)

Figure 7-4. Back Plate, 2 I/O Motherboard

= Back Plate Mounting Studs (7 Locations) 7-5 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FOR I/O
MOTHERBOARD
Figure 7-2. Back Plate, I/O Motherboard & 4 P.S.
The following paragraph provides the step-by-step procedure
to install a I/O motherboard into a single loop configured sys-
MOTHER BD CCM RS485 KIDDE-FENWAL, INC. ASHLAND, MA 01721
TBL RELAY
tem.
06-129562-001

W2 W3
NO
NC
C
B
A

W4

N
DS1

1
S2

S1

AC OUT
L
N
2

a. Place motherboard on standoffs in the back of the enclo-

L
1
2

1
2

G
AC IN
N
L

24V
S3

DC IN 1

RET

SHR
RET
AUX 1 AUX 2

24V

sure.
RET
R

24V
TB8 TB9
W1

TP3 TP4
RET

RET

24V

SHR
RET

24V

RET

24V

RET

24V

-
+

BAT F1
SYSTEM POWER DC IN 2

b. Insert and tighten the 12 mounting screws provided with

MOTHER BD CCM RS485 KIDDE-FENWAL, INC. ASHLAND, MA 01721
TBL RELAY
06-129562-001

W2 W3
NO
NC
C
B
A

W4

N
DS1

1
S2

S1

AC OUT
L
N

the motherboard.
2
L
1
2

1
2

G
AC IN
N
L

24V
S3

DC IN 1

RET

SHR
RET
AUX 1 AUX 2

24V

RET
R

24V

c. Connect the 24VDC wiring from the power supply to termi-

TB8 TB9
W1

TP3 TP4
RET

RET

24V

SHR
RET

24V

RET

24V

RET

24V

-
+

BAT F1
SYSTEM POWER DC IN 2

nal TB1.
MOTHER BD CCM RS485 KIDDE-FENWAL, INC. ASHLAND, MA 01721
TBL RELAY

d. Connect the RJ-12 phone style wire from the MOTHER BD

06-129562-001

W2 W3
NO
NC
C
B
A

W4

connector (on the power supply) to J9 on the motherboard.

N
DS1

1
S2

S1

AC OUT
L
N
2
L
1
2

1
2

G
AC IN
N
L

24V
S3

DC IN 1

RET

SHR
RET
AUX 1 AUX 2

24V

RET
R

24V
TB8 TB9
W1

TP3 TP4
RET

RET

24V

SHR
RET

24V

RET

24V

RET

24V

-
+

BAT F1
SYSTEM POWER DC IN 2

MOTHER BD CCM RS485 KIDDE-FENWAL, INC. ASHLAND, MA 01721

TBL RELAY
06-129562-001

W2 W3
NO
NC
C
B
A

W4

N
DS1

1
S2

S1

AC OUT
L
N
2
L
1
2

1
2

G
AC IN

7-6 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FOR RX/TX

N
L

24V
S3

DC IN 1

RET

SHR
RET
AUX 1 AUX 2

24V

RET
R

24V
TB8 TB9
W1

MODULE (MULTI-LOOP ONLY)

TP3 TP4
RET

RET

24V

SHR
RET

24V

RET

24V

RET

24V

-
+

BAT F1
SYSTEM POWER DC IN 2

The following paragraph provides the step-by-step procedure

= Back Plate Mounting Studs (7 Locations) for replacing the RX/TX module. Refer to Figure 7-5.
Ensure the RX/TX jumpers are set properly during the proce-
Figure 7-3. Back Plate, 8 P.S.
dure. Verify that the settings of the jumpers on the RX/TX Mod-
ule conform to the wiring style of the system being installed.
The RX/TX is shipped from the factory programmed for Style 6
wiring style. Refer to Drawing No. 06-235443-002, in Appendix
I, which is the installation drawing which shows the jumper lo-
cations on the RX/TX module. The settings are used to set the
wiring style ( 4, 6 or 7), 7 being used with loop isolators. Jump-
ers on the RX/TX Module are noted by JP x and Wx (x = a
single digit) call-outs on the module board. Table 7-1 lists the
types of allowable configurations you can select along with their
respective jumpers.

August 1999 7-2 76-100016-001

Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System PEGAsys
NOTE: Since the RX/TX's are not addressed by switches the
slot that they are installed in will become there address.
Example: A RX/TX installed in JP1 on the multi-loop
motherboard will become RX/TX 1, Loop 1. If the same
RX/TX was changed into JP4, the address would
become RX/TX 4, Loop 4.

7-7 INSTALLATION OF I/O MODULES

The I/O modules can be inserted into the motherboard in any
order. The CCM automatically reads the I/O modules type and
address upon registration. However, it is recommended that you
insert modules performing like functions adjacent to each other
to facilitate identification and field wiring runs. After powering
up the system, you can request a list of I/O Module assign-
ments from the system menu to verify their registration and ac-
curacy of module address(s).
CAUTION
All personnel installing or servicing PEGAsys equip-
ment must wear a grounding strap when working
Figure 7-5. Installation for Multi-Loop in the Central Control panel to avoid generating
static electricity which can destroy integrated cir-
Table 7-1 RX/TX Configuration Selection cuits. Input / Output Module printed circuit boards
are shipped in anti-static plastic bags and should
be kept in these bags until you are ready to install
Style 6
Jumper Style 4 Style 6 W/Loop Style 7
them. When you remove these circuit boards from
Isolator the Motherboard, they should be replaced in to the
appropriate bags. NEVER PACK THESE BOARDS
W1 & W2 Open Shorted Shorted Shorted IN STYROFOAM OR PLASTIC PELLETS.
WARNING
JP 2 Shorted Shorted Open Open
Input/Output Modules should never be installed in
JP 3 Shorted Shorted Open Open a powered-up system. Always disconnect both
AC and battery power before installing or remov-
NOTE: Style seven (7) requires the use of loop isolators, the ing I/O Modules.
RX/TX module requires the use of one (1) P/N 74- To remove a I/O module from the system; secure power, re-
200012-001 isolator module to operate in the Style 7 move terminal block from module, remove the two mounting
configuration. screws and pull out the module.
a. Remove RX/TX module from packing and inspect for physi- The following paragraphs describe the installation procedure
cal damage. for each available I/O module type.
b. Ensure jumper configuration is set. Refer to Table 7-1 set-
ting per wiring style used. 7-7.1 Signal Audible Output Module
c. Install loop isolator, P/N 74-200012-001, if used.
The following paragraph provides the step-by-step procedure to
d. Connect 24VDC wiring from terminal block (TB1-TB8) to install a signal audible output module into the PEGAsys system.
24VDC input plug J1. The terminal block which will be used
to power the RX/TX will be dependant upon which slot the a. Remove the signal audible output module from packing and
RX/TX will be installed into. inspect for physical damage.
e. Install the short 6 conductor cable from the RS-232 port on b. Set address switches. Refer to drawing 06-235371-006 in
the RX/TX to either RJ12 sockets JP1-JP8. The socket se- Appendix I for address switch settings.
lected is dependant upon which slot the RX/TX will be in- c. Set jumpers W1-W3 for appropriate Y/Z wiring styles (refer
stalled into. to Drawing No. 06-235443-006 in the back of the manual
f. Place the RX/TX against the mounting bracket, in the PE- for jumper settings).
GAsys, over the desired slot to be placed in. Install the two d. Cut jumper between W9 & W10 if using an auxiliary 24VDC
mounting screws and tighten until snug. power input.
g. Removal of the RX/TX would be in the reverse order. e. Install module onto the motherboard. Ensure the connec-
tor mates properly.
f. Insert and tighten mounting screws. Refer to appropriate
Figure 5-1 or 5-2.

76-100016-001 7-3 August 1999

PEGAsys Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System

7-7.2 Relay Output Module e. Set jumpers in accordance with Drawing No. 06-235443-
003 (located in the back of this manual).
The following paragraph provides the step-by-step procedure
to install a relay output module into the PEGAsys system. f. Install module in the desired position on the back plate of
the main or extension enclosure.
a. Remove the relay output module from packing and inspect
g. Insert and tighten the four mounting screws/nuts into the
for physical damage.
four corners of the mounting plate.
b. Set address switches. Refer to Drawing No. 06-235443-
007 in Appendix I for address switch settings. 7-7.7 Power Supply/Charger Assembly, Expansion
c. Install module onto the motherboard. Ensure the connec- Enclosure
tor mates properly.
The following paragraph provides the step-by-step procedure
d. Insert and tighten mounting screws. Refer to appropriate to install a power supply/charger assembly into the expansion
Figure 5-1 or 5-2. enclosure.
7-7.3 Agent Release Module a. Remove the power supply/charger assembly from packing
and inspect for physical damage.
The following paragraph provides the step-by-step procedure
b. Set address switches. Refer to Drawing No. 06-235443-
to install a agent release module into the PEGAsys system.
003 in Appendix I for address switch settings.
a. Remove the agent release module from packing and c. Identify module revision by referring to Figures 3-5 and 3-
inspect for physical damage. 6.
b. Set address switches. Refer to drawing 06-235443- d. Ensure the wiring connections between the switching power
005 in Appendix I for address switch settings. supply (Aux. Power Supply) and monitor module (Main
Power Supply) are accomplished in accordance with the
c. Set switches S3 & S4 for solenoid or initiator activa- appropriate Figure, Figure 7-8 or 7-9.
tion (refer to drawing 06-235443-005 in the back of the
WHT
manual for switch settings). BLK/WHT

d. Cut jumper between W1 & W2 if using an auxiliary

24VDC power input.
e. Install module onto the motherboard. Ensure the con-
nector mates properly.
AC OUT AC IN DC IN 1
1 2

RET

SPV
24V
N L N L G N L
attribute ? attribute ? attribute ? attribute ? attribute ?

f. Insert and tighten mounting screws. Refer to appropri- SHARE

ORN
RED
RED
ate Figure 5-1 or 5-2.
24V

attribute ?

DC IN 2
RET BLK
RET BLK

attribute ?
7-7.4 City-Tie Output Module MAIN POWER SUPPLY
(76-100009-001)
The following paragraph provides the step-by-step procedure
to install a city tie output module into the PEGAsys system.
a. Remove the agent release module from packing and in-
spect for physical damage.
b. Set module configuration. Refer to drawing 06-235443-008
in Appendix I.
c. Install module on the motherboard. Ensure the connector
mates properly.
d. Insert and tighten mounting screws. Refer to appropriate AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLY
(76-100009-002) WHT
Figure 5-1 or 5-2. BLK/WHT

BLK

7-7.6 Power Supply/Charger Assembly BLK

RED
RED
The following paragraph provides the step-by-step procedure ORN

to install a power supply/charger assembly into the PEGAsys

system.
a. Remove the power supply/charger assembly from packing
and inspect for physical damage. Figure 7-6. Power Supply/Charger (Rev A), Wiring Diagram
b. Set address switches. Refer to drawing 06-235443-003 in
Appendix I for address switch settings.
c. Identify module revision by referring to Figures 3-5 and 3-
6.
d. Ensure the wiring connections between the switching power
supply (Aux. Power Supply) and monitor module (Main
Power Supply) are accomplished in accordance with the
appropriate Figure, Figure 7-6 or 7-7.

August 1999 7-4 76-100016-001

Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System PEGAsys
WHT
BLK/WHT
g. Insert and tighten the four mounting screws into the four
ORN corners of the mounting plate.
RED
RED
BLK
Table 7-2. Aux. Power Supply Module Connections to Rev A,
BLK Main Power Supply/Charger Assembly
VIO

AC OUT AC IN DC IN 1 DC IN 2

SHARE
1 2

RET

SPV

RET

SPV
24V

24V
N L N L L N G
attribute ? attribute ? attribute ? attribute ? attribute ? attribute ? attribute ?

Aux. Power
Function M ain Supply
Su p p l y

White AC input (Neutral) TB13 (N)

MAIN POWER SUPPLY Black / White AC Input (Hot) TB13 (L)

(76-100009-010)
Red DC Output (Pos.) TB9 (24VDC)

Black DC Output (Neg.) TB8 (Ret)

Orange Share TB9 (SHR)

Table 7-3. Aux. Power Supply Module Connections to Rev C,

AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLY Main Power Supply/Charger Assembly
WHT
(76-100009-002) BLK/WHT

BLK
Aux. Power Supply Function M ain Supply
BLK
VIO
RED
RED White AC input (Neutral) TB13 (N)
ORN

Black / White AC Input (Hot) TB13 (L)

Red DC Output (Pos.) TB9 (24VDC)

Figure 7-7. Power Supply/Charger (Rev C), Wiring Diagram Black DC Output (Neg.) TB8 (Ret)
e. Set jumpers in accordance with drawing 06-235443-003
Violet Supervision TB8 (SPV)
(located in the back of this manual).
f. Install module in the desired position on the back plate of Orange Share TB9 (SHR)
the expansion enclosure.
N
1
AC OUT
attribute ?

WHT
N
2

BLK/WHT
attribute ?

L
G

MAIN POWER SUPPLY AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLY

AC IN
attribute ?

N
L

(76-100009-001) 24V
(76-100009-003)
attribute ?

DC IN 1

RET

SPV
attribute ?

attribute ? attribute ?
RET

RET

24V

SHARE

DC IN 2

ORN
RED
RED
BLK
BLK

Figure 7-8. Power Supply/Charger (Rev A), Wiring Diagram for Expansion Enclosure
N
1
AC OUT
attribute ?
attribute ?

WHT
N
2

BLK/WHT
attribute ?
attribute ?

L
L

MAIN POWER SUPPLY AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLY

AC IN
attribute ?
attribute ?

N
G

ORN
(76-100009-010) 24V
(76-100009-003)
attribute ?
attribute ?

RED
DC IN 1

RET

SPV
RED
attribute ?

BLK
attribute ?

SHARE
BLK
24V
VIO
attribute ?
attribute ?

DC IN 2

RET

SPV
attribute ?
attribute ?

Figure 7-9. Power Supply/Charger (Rev C), Wiring Diagram for Expansion Enclosure

76-100016-001 7-5 August 1999

PEGAsys Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System

7-7.8. Power Supply Communication Connections

7-9 INSTALL AND CONNECT DC POWER
Both Rev. A & C communicate with the CCM over the I/O bus of
the PEGAsys system. To that end, there are different ways of Space is provided within the Central Control Panel for two 12V
connecting these components. The power supply unit in the 33AH sealed lead acid batteries used for 24 hour standby op-
main enclosure of the PEGAsys system communicates with the eration.
CCM over a short phone style cable. The I/O bus extends out of
the power supply when needed, i.e., a motherboard installed or 7-9.1 Battery Enclosure
other power supplies installed in expansion enclosure without a
motherboard. These two examples are accomplished as fol- A separate UL Listed battery enclosure, shown in Figure 7-10,
lows: (P/N 76-100010-001) is used to house up to two 12V, 40AH,
sealed lead-acid batteries. The enclosure is designed to be sur-
1. Power supply in main enclosure to motherboard in main face mounted using only hardware similar to that used on the
enclosure; A flat six conductor phone type cable is attached CCP (See Paragraph 7-3) and must be mounted within 100 feet
to CON 2 of power supply and then inserted into the RJ- of the panel.
12 jack on the motherboard labeled I/O buss. Remove
jumper W4 to enable the terminating resistor on the moth- NOTE: Wiring for the batteries to the power supply must be
erboard, the terminating resistor is used to balance the RS- sized accordingly to prevent unacceptable voltage
485 communications. drops.
2. Power supplies installed in expansion enclosure without a
motherboard can use the RS-485 terminal block (TB1). This 7-9.2 Batteries
connection allows the installer to connect a twisted pair Refer to Appendix A for required system power calculations.
AWG-18 cable to terminals A & B of TB1 on the power Refer to Appendix E for FM Pre-Action/Deluge sprinkler require-
supply in the main enclosure and connect to the same ter- ments for 90-hour standby periods.
minals on the power supply in the expansion enclosure, as
shown in the following diagram. This connection must be Recommended battery manufacturers and models are:
daisy chained to other power supplies in the expansion en- Standby
closure, if installed. Jumper W4 must be removed from all Time Battery
power supplies in line except the last power supply unit in
the expansion enclosure. This will maintain the terminating 24 Hours Panasonic LCR 12V 17AP,17 AH
resistor at the end of the RS-485 circuit, which is required (P/N 06-115915-046)
to ensure proper operation of the RS-485 communications. 60 Hours Power Sonic 12330, 33 AH (2 sets)
(P/N 89-100052-001)
90 Hours Power Sonic 12330, 33 AH (3 sets)
(P/N 89-100052-001)
The batteries should be rated for standby power use and fit
7-8 CONNECTING AC POWER within the physical dimensions of the respective enclosure. The
batteries must have terminals that accept standard ring-type
AC power must be provided to the Central Control Panels in- solderless connectors.
ternal power supply using three conductors. The AC power cable
is to be run through a conduit from a dedicated, 15 amp circuit CAUTION
breaker. The conduit must be attached to the right side of the Do not connect the batteries to the systems power
Central Control Panel enclosure through one of the knockouts supply at this time. Connect the batteries at the end
near the upper right corner of the enclosure. of the system's installation.
See Appendix A for AC branch circuit requirements details. Connection to the power supply must be according to drawing
WARNING 06-235443-003, in Appendix I.

High voltages may be present when connecting AC

power to the Central Control Panel. Suitable pre-
cautions must be taken to avoid injury.
NOTE: All Non-Power-Limited wiring must be routed away from
Power Limited wiring by a minimum of 1/4", per NFPA
& UL requirements. For Power Limited Circuits use
Type FPL, FPLP, or FPLR cable per NEC Article 760.
Insure that the circuit breaker at the dedicated AC power source
is in the OFF position. Attach the three AC power conductors to
TB1 on the Central Control Panels power supply PCB as shown
on drawing No. 06-235443-003, in Appendix I.

August 1999 7-6 76-100016-001

Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System PEGAsys
circuits (signal & release), using unshielded cable for all cir-
cuits is only recommended when all output devices connected
are Kidde products. All conduit and conductors must meet NEC,
NFPA-72 and any applicable local code requirements. See Fig-
ure 7-12 for shielded cable termination. Optionally, the PC line
can be installed in a separate conduit as shown previously, thus
allowing the PC line to remain straight lay wire.

Figure 7-10. Battery Enclosure

Figure 7-11. Conduit to CCP

7-10 FIELD DEVICE CONNECTION TO RX/TX

MODULE
Field devices connect to terminal block (TB1) located on the
PEGAsys Systems Receiver/Transmitter (RX/TX). The cable
connecting the field devices to the RX/TX module provides power
and bidirectional communications to the loop devices. One RX/
TX module can support up to 255 SmartOne addressable field
devices. These 255 addresses can be any mixture of intelligent
loop device inputs and outputs without restriction to amounts of
either inputs or outputs.
Figure 7-12. Shielded Wire to CCP
NOTE: All Non Power Limited wiring must be routed away from
Power Limited wiring by a minimum of 1/4", per NFPA NOTE: All new RCUs are shipped from Kidde with their address
& UL requirements. For Power Limited Circuits use set to 000. This address is reserved for unregistered
Type FPL, FPLP, or FPLR cable per NEC Article 760. devices and cannot be used as a registered address.
You must connect unaddressed devices to the RX/TX
7-10.1 Wiring the RX/TX PC Line Module one at a time in order to address them.
Otherwise you may pre address devices using the hand
The RX/TX PC line uses Broadcast Indexing Protocol (BIP) for held device programmer (P/N 74-200013-001) and
communications with intelligent loop devices. The PC Line may connect multiple pre-addressed loop devices to the RX/
be configured in NFPA-72, Style 4, 6, or 7. The PC Line is ca- TX PC line at the same time.
pable of supporting 255 intelligent loop devices on a 2-wire loop.
Table 7-1 lists the types of allowable configurations you can
In retrofit applications, existing wiring can be used as long as it select along with the respective jumper settings for those con-
meets NEC 760 and NFPA 72 requirements. When installing figurations. As described in this chapter the PC line can be con-
new wiring or using existing wiring it is necessary to check line figured in Style 4, 6, or 7. Each Style is represented in Figures
resistance and capacitance. Total line resistance can not be 7-13 through 7-16.
greater than 26 Ohms, and capacitance can not exceed 1.0
microFarad. Kidde recommends that you use No. 18 AWG mini- Style 4 configurations allow T-tapping. T-tapping is only limited
mum wiring as the connection cable between the RX/TX Mod- by sound installation techniques.
ule and the field devices
The PC line to the loop devices can be run in conduit to the
Central Control Panel cabinet. The conduit, if used must be
attached through any convenient Central Control Panel enclo-
sure knockout. Route the connection cable to TB1 on the RX/
TX PCB, and insert the end of each connection cable wire into
its proper TB1 slot and tighten the slot screws firmly. See Fig-
ure 7-11.
In retrofit applications where the PC line of the RX/TX may be
mixed in an existing conduit with appropriately loaded output

76-100016-001 7-7 August 1999

PEGAsys
Figure 7-13. Style 4, RX/TX PC Line Connections
In the Style 6 wiring, configuration the RX/TX automatically trans-
mits data and power bidirectionally when a break in the PC line
wiring occurs. If the break is in a single conductor, all loop de-
vices will remain fully operational. For Style 6 PC line connec-
tions, if a PC line open trouble is encountered, use the system
reset switch on the display and control board, or push the bot-
tom button on the RX/TX board, to reset the PC line to normal
once the fault is corrected.
August 1999
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
Figure 7-14. Style 6, RX/TX PC Line Connections
Loop Isolator devices are available to support NFPA-72 Wiring
Style 7 and would be installed on the PC line of the RX/TX mod-
ule. Isolator packages are available for electrical box mount
(Single Gang), 6 Base mount and RX/TX mount.
By "flanking" each group of loop devices with a pair of loop
isolators, each zone is protected from opens and shorts. A zone
is defined as a group of loop devices. In this style of installa-
tion, a short circuit between any two loop isolators will not effect
any other zone. The isolators on each side of the short will open
the PC line.
7-8 76-100016-001
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
Figure 7-15. Style 6, RX/TX PC Line Connections with Loop
Isolators
Figure 7-16 and the RX/TX Module Installation Wiring Diagram
(Dwg. No. 06-235443-002), located in the back of this manual,
depicts a typical NFPA Style 7 installation.
NOTE: The maximum number of loop devices that can be
connected between loop isolators is 30. During a short
circuit fault condition, the control panel will register a
trouble condition for each device located between the
two affected loop isolators.
76-100016-001
PEGAsys
Figure 7-16. Style 7, RX/TX PC Line Connection
7-11 OUTPUT SIGNAL CONNECTION
The PEGAsys System provides output signals to drive alarm
devices and communicate with central stations and control
equipment. These outputs are provided on the CCM and op-
tional I/O modules.
Each connection cable to output devices is to be run from the
output device circuit to the Central Control Panel. The cable
must be brought through any convenient Central Control Panel
enclosure knockout. Route each connection cable to the termi-
nal block located on the respective Output Module, insert the
end of each connection cable wire into its proper terminal block
slot, and tighten the slot screws firmly.
Instructions for connecting output devices are provided on their
respective Installation Wiring Diagrams located in the Appen-
dix I of this manual. Refer to the respective manufacturers lit-
erature for specific installation instructions of output devices.
NOTE: All Non Power Limited wiring must be routed away from
Power Limited wiring by a minimum of 1/4", per NFPA
& UL requirements. For Power Limited Circuits use
Type FPL, FPLP, or FPLR cable per NEC Article 760.
7-9 August 1999
PEGAsys Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System

7-14.1 Setting and Adjusting Smoke and Heat

7-12 EXTERNAL POWER FAILURE INDICATOR Detector Sensitivity Procedure
CONNECTION
The step-by-step procedure to perform the setting sensitivity
The PEGAsys System provides a 2 A @ 30 VDC SPDT relay on test follows:
the power supply control unit that de-energizes (normally pow-
a. Access the PEGAsys system menus by:
ered) in the event of a power supply monitor trouble - troubles
include: (1) Press 0 (zero) key. Verify that the display reads:
AC Power Failure PLEASE ENTER PASSWORD
24 VDC Power Supply Failure (2) Type in the Level 2 password.
Battery Failure
(3) Press the return () key. Verify that the display
Ground Fault reads:
Communications Failure
1:ISOLATE 2:LIST
The power supply trouble relay is normally powered so that in 3:SET 4:TEST
the event of power failure the relay will transfer to the normally
closed position. The contact can be used to signal an external b. Select the Detector Sensitivity by typing in 3-3-2. Verify that
power supply trouble indicator. the display reads:

The connection cable to an external power supply trouble indi- 1:IONIZATION 2:PHOTOELECTRIC
cating device is to be run through a conduit from the indicating 3:THERMAL (<) to return
device to the Central Control Panel. The conduit must be at- c. Select the desired detector style which is to have its sensi-
tached to any convenient Central Control Panel enclosure knock- tivity adjusted. After type selection, the system display:
out. Connect cable to TB1 on the Central Control Panels power
supply PCB as shown in Figure 3-6. SET DETECTOR SENSITIVITY
DETECTORS FROM _ _ _ _ TO _ _ _ _
NOTE: The user would enter the address range of the
detectors to be adjusted. The range can be from 1 to
7-13 DETECTOR INSTALLATION 255. The system will adjust the sensitivity of all the
Refer to the SmartOne Smoke and Heat Detector Installation specified type of detectors which were previously
Sheet (74-212) for installation instructions. Also, refer to Chap- chosen (Ion, Photo or Heat) within the range.
ter 2, Paragraph 2-8.6 for setting addresses and registering d. Press the return pushbutton and the display will read:
RCUs.
SET DETECTOR SENSITIVITY
PREALARM _._ (0.2 -3.0 / FT)

7-14 SETTING AND ADJUSTING SMOKE & HEAT

DETECTOR SENSITIVITIES TOLERANCE RANGES

Setting the sensitivity of SmartOne ionization and photoelectric Device Open Area High Velocity
smoke detectors and heat detectors is accomplished by setting Ionization 0.5 - 1.5%/FT 0.5 -1.0 %/FT
the threshold alarm and pre-alarm smoke density levels. The
SmartOne smoke detectors (Ionization and Photoelectric) were Photoelectric 0.2 - 3.5 %/FT 0.2 - 2.0 %/FT
previously programmed for a device application during the reg- Device 50-FT spacing 70-FT Spacing
istration process.
Thermal 80 - 155 F 80 - 145 F
The smoke detectors have specific sensitivities for particular
applications. There are 3 applications which represent the ma-
jority of detector use: Open Area, Open Area (High AirFlow) e. This prompt asks the user for the Pre-alarm level for the
and Duct. detector(s) to be set. Key in the desired pre alarm level
and press the return key. After pressing return the display
The sensitivity adjustment is accomplished in one of two ways:
will read:
1. Smoke & Heat Detector Configuration. During the SET DETECTOR SENSITIVITY
process of configuring the system using the PCS program, the
ALARM _._ (0.5 -3.0 / FT)
operator selects the application of the detector and adjusts the
settings of the alarm and pre-alarm values within the range for
the application chosen, or accept the default values for the ap-
TOLERANCE RANGE
plication.
2. Level Setting Operation. This procedure is selected Device Open Area High Velocity
from the menus. This method is generally used for systems Ionization 0.5 - 1.5%/FT 0.5 -1.0 %/FT
which have been installed and operational for a period of time.
It should only be used if there is a need to change the sensitiv- Photoelectric 0.5 - 3.5 %/FT 0.5 - 2.0 %/FT
ity of the device.

August 1999 7-10 76-100016-001

Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
Device 50-FT spacing 70-FT Spacing
Thermal 135 - 155 F 135 - 145 F
f. This prompt asks the user for the alarm level for the
detector(s) to be set. Key in the desired alarm level and
press the return key. After pressing return the display will
read:
LEVELS SET ON XX DETECTORS
g. This message verifies that the desired sensitivity adjust-
ments were done on XX amount of detectors. The sensitiv-
ity of all specified detectors (depending on which type was
previously selected) will be set in the previous procedure.
7-15 ADDRESSABLE CONTACT INPUT DEVICE
INSTALLATION
The Addressable Contact Input Devices are designed to be in-
stalled in a North American 2-1/2 in. (64 mm) deep one-gang
box, or a standard 4 in. square box 1-1/2 (38 mm) deep with a
one-gang blank cover. The AI terminal block will accept #14,
#16, and #18 AWG wire (1.5, 1.0, and 0.75 mm2 respectively)
with size #18 being a minimum requirement. Refer to the wiring
the diagram in Appendix I for specific connection information.
Also refer to Chapter 2, Paragraphs 2-8.6 and 2-8.7 for setting
addresses and other parameters. The installation must comply
with national and local electrical codes.
7-16 ADDRESSABLE RELAY OUTPUT DEVICE
INSTALLATION
The Addressable Contact Output Devices are designed to be
installed in a North American 2-1/2 in. (64 mm) deep one-gang
box, or a standard 4 in. square box 1-1/2 (38 mm) deep with a
one-gang blank cover. The AI terminal block will accept #14,
#16, and #18 AWG wire (1.5, 1.0, and 0.75 mm2 respectively)
with size #18 being a minimum requirement. Refer to drawing
number 06-234563-001 located in Appendix I, for specific con-
nection information on both devices. Also, refer to Chapter 2,
Paragraphs 2-8.6 and 2-8.7 for setting addresses and other
parameters. The installation must comply with national and lo-
cal electrical codes.
NOTE: All Non Power Limited wiring must be routed away from
Power Limited wiring by a minimum of 1/4", per NFPA
& UL requirements. For Power Limited Circuits use
Type FPL, FPLP, or FPLR cable per NEC Article 760.
7-17 INSTALLATION CHECKOUT
Before powering up the PEGAsys for the first time, ensure that
the following has been completed:
a. Central Control Module (CCM), RX/TX Module and System
Power Supply are secured to the back of the enclosure.
b. CCM is connected to the RX/TX Module, Display Assem-
bly, System Power Supply (I/O bus and 24 VDC), and Re-
mote RS-232 peripheral(s) if any.
76-100016-001
PEGAsys
c. CCMs configuration jumpers configured correctly to insure
proper operation of the programmable (signal / release)
output (MP1).
d. Optional Motherboard if installed, is connected to the CCM
(I/O bus) and System Power Supply (24 VDC).
e. RX/TX Module is connected to the CCM (RJ-12) and sys-
tem power supply (24 VDC).
f. Output Modules if used, are installed in the Motherboard,
addressed correctly, configured for appropriate mode of op-
eration and their external wiring is connected correctly.
g. Perform the Power-Up procedure in Chapter 4, Paragraph
4-5.
h. Refer to Chapter 2 for system operations and programming.
7-18 CONNECTION OF PERIPHERALS
The following paragraphs will describe how to connect a termi-
nal or personal computer and a printer.
7-18.1 Connecting a Terminal or Personal Computer
A UL Listed EDP terminal or computer can be connected to the
systems RS-232 port. A 6-wire RJ-12 type modular phone jack
(PC port), located on the CCM, provides easy connection.
The terminal or computer connection cable must have a RJ-12
type modular phone plug that connects to the CCM (use P/N
74-100016-003, for a DB9 connector for laptops, or P/N 74-
100016-001 for a DB25 connector for personal computers). The
connector at the terminal end must be of the type required by
the terminal device. Route the connection cable to one of the
RS-232 modular plug into the jack until it snaps into place. The
terminal or computer must be located in the same room as the
Central Control Panel.
The parameters and connections for the RS-232 printer port
are as follows:
PARAMETERS
9600 Baud
8 Data Bits
1 Stop Bit
No Parity
NOTE: These parameters are fixed and not adjustable.
PIN and FUNCTION
1 TX
2 Signal Ground
3 RTS
4 CTS
5 N/C
6 RX
7-18.2 Connecting a Printer
The RS-232 printer port of the CCM is a supervised connec-
tion. The installer must enable the printer port for operation.
The enabling or disabling of the printer port would be done by
accessing the 1st or 2nd level menu.
7-11 August 1999
PEGAsys Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System

A simple connection cable is all that is needed to connect the

serial printer to the RS-232 port of the CCM. The following dia-
gram represents the cable.
CCM PIN PRINTER
TX 1. RX (receive data)
Sig. Gnd. 2. Sig. Gnd.
RTS 3.
CTS* 4. DTR*
N/C 5.
RX 6.

* +8 to +12 VDC signal needed for supervision if using a graphic

annunciator.

Figure 7-17. CCM Printer Port

August 1999 7-12 76-100016-001

Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System PEGAsys

APPENDIX A
POWER SUPPLY REQUIREMENTS

A-1 AC BRANCH CIRCUIT

The PEGAsys fire alarm/suppression control system requires connection to a separate dedicated AC branch circuit (120 or 240
VAC), which must be labeled FIRE ALARM. This branch circuit must connect to the line side of the main power feed of the protected
premises. No other equipment may be powered from the fire-alarm branch circuit. The branch circuit wire must run continuously,
without any disconnect devices, from the power source to the fire alarm/suppression control panel. When multiple power supplies are
installed in the system enclosure(s) they must all be fed from the same circuit. Over-current protection for this circuit must comply with
Article 760 of the National Electric Code, NFPA-72 as well as applicable local codes. Use a minimum of # 14 AWG with 600-volt
insulation for this branch circuit.

Table A-1: AC Branch Circuit Requirements (120 VAC)

Number of Current Draw Total Current

Device Type
Devices (Amps) per Device

Control Panel 1 X 1.9 = 1.9

AuxiliaryPower
Supply or ( ) X 1.9 =
Module

Sum column for

AC Branch = Amps
Current required

NOTE: Each main power supply and power supply module added to the system would increase the AC requirement
by 1.9 Amps (max.)
Table A-2: AC Branch Circuit Requirements (220 VAC)

Number of Current Draw Total Current

Device Type
Devices (Amps) per Device

Control Panel 1 X 0.95 = 0.95

AuxiliaryPower
( ) X 0.95 =
supply

Sum column for

AC Branch = Amps
Current required

NOTE: Each main power supply and power supply module added to the system would increase the AC requirement
by 0.95 Amps (max.)

76-100016-001 A-1 August 1999

PEGAsys Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System

A-2 SYSTEM STANDBY POWER REQUIREMENTS

The control panel provides regulated power for operating external devices, system operation, and standby battery charging. The
power for operating external devices is expandable. When using additional main power supplies in expansion cabinets, each supply
must be evaluated for its loading in the same way as the primary power supply in the main cabinet.

NOTE: Use Table A3 (Standby or non-alarm) to determine main system power supply and any installed auxiliary power module
standby current requirements.

Table A-3: Standby Power Requirements (24 VDC)

Maximum
Standby Module /
Module / Device Standby
Current(Amps) System
Current (Amps)
Central Control Module 0.070 X 1 = 0.070
RXTX module 0.035 X =
Power supply Monitor 0.060 X =
Auxiliary Output 1, Max 1.5A (See
X =
Notes 1 & 2)
Auxiliary Output 2, Max 1.5A (See
X =
Notes 1 & 2)
Multi-Loop Mother Board 0.035 X =
Signal Audible Output Module 0.025 X =
Relay Output Module 0.010 X =
City Tie Output Module 0.030 X =
Agent Release Output Module 0.065 X =
FIELD DEVICES X =
Ionization Detector 0.000400 X =
Photoelectric Detector 0.000405 X =
Addressable Contact Input 0.000310 X =
Addressable Contact Output 0.000330 X =
Loop Isolators 0.001 X =
Sum Column for
Standby Load = Amps
(Notes 2)

NOTE: 1. Auxiliary Outputs and each must be considered for total standby alarm loading of the system power supply.
2. Use of auxiliary 24 VDC outputs of during standby operation must not cause the calculated standby current of the
system to exceed its rated maximum as defined in the Table A-6.

August 1999 A-2 76-100016-001

Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System PEGAsys

A-3 SYSTEM ALARM POWER REQUIREMENTS

NOTE: Use Table A4 (Alarm ) to determine main system power supply and any installed auxiliary power module combination,
alarm current requirements. When using additional main power supplies in expansion cabinets, each supply must be
evaluated for its own loading in the same way as the primary power supply in the main cabinet.
Table A-4: Alarm Power Requirements (24 VDC)

Alarm Current Module / Maximum Alarm

Module / Device
(Amps) System Current (Amps)
Central Control Module 0.210 X 1 = 0.210
CCM MP01 and MP02 Output (See Note 1) X
RXTX Module 0.035 X =
Power Supply Monitor 0.060 X =
Auxiliary Output 1, Max 1.5A (See Note 2) X =
Auxiliary Output , Max 1.5A (See Note 2) X =
Multi-Loop Mother Board .035 X =
Signal Audible Output Module 0.135 X =
Signal Module Outputs (See Note 3) X =
Relay Output Module 0.075 X =
City Tie Output Module 0.080 X =
Agent Release Output Module 0.150 X =
Agent Release Module Signal Circuit (See
X =
Note 5)
Agent Release Module Signal Circuits (Note
X =
4)
FIELD DEVICES X =
Ionization Detector 0.000440 X =
Photoelectric Detector 0.000445 X =
Addressable Contact Input 0.000380 X =
Addressable Zone Monitor 0.000400 X =
Addressable Contact Output 0.000350 X =
Loop Isolators (Active) 0.007 X =
Sum Column
for Alarm = Amps
Load

NOTE: 1. Central Control Module (CCM) Alarm condition power requirements must be evaluated for loading of the signaling
devices. Each signal circuit can provide up to 2 amps of 24 VDC power for signaling device use.
2. Auxiliary Outputs would have to be considered for total alarm loading of the system power supply.
3. Each Signal output modules alarm condition power requirements must be evaluated for loading of the signaling
devices. Each signal circuit can provide up to 2 amps of 24 VDC power for signaling device use. There are a total of 4
signal circuits per module.
4. Each Agent Release module contains three signaling circuits which must be evaluated for loading. Each signal circuit
will provide up to 2 amps of 24 VDC power for signaling device use. There are a total of 3 signal circuits per module.
5. When using constant power solenoids, the current draw of the solenoid must be added in the calculation. Momentary
solenoids and initiators are negligible in there current draws and do not need to be added into the total calculation.

76-100016-001 A-3 August 1999

PEGAsys Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System

A-4 CALCULATING BATTERY SIZE REQUIRED

Table A-5 sums the standby and alarm loads to arrive at the battery size, in amp hours (AH), needed to support the control panel.
There is a maximum battery size which the system power supply (P/N 76-100009-010) is capable of charging. Select batteries which
meet or exceed the total amp hours (AH) calculated and are within the acceptable range of the system battery charger output, which
is 12 to 99 AH. Using the totals from Table A-3 and Table A-4, complete Table A-5 to determine the total battery (AH) capacity
necessary for the power supply.

Table A-5: Total Battery Capacity Required

Total Standby Load Required Standby Time (4, 24,

(From table A-3) X 60 or 90) hours =
( ) ( )

Total Alarm Load(From Required Alarm Time

table A-4) (5 min. enter 0.084)
X =
(10 Min. enter 0.167)
( ) ( )

Total Amp Hours Required

=
(Sum of above)

(Derating Factor) X 0.1

Total AH Required
(Original AH required + =
Derating Factor)

NOTE: 1. Main system enclosure can house up to (2) 33 AH batteries (P/N 89-100052-001). If an auxiliary power module is added to the
system the batteries must be moved to a separate battery box or secondary enclosure, if used.
2. NFPA 72 - 1996 Protected Premises or Proprietary fire alarm systems require 24 hours of standby power followed by 5
minutes alarm activation.
3. NFPA 72 - 1996 Auxiliary or Remote Station require 60 hours of standby power followed by 5 minutes alarm activation.
4. NFPA 72 - 1996 allow 4 hours of standby battery capacity if there is an automatic starting engine driven generator.
5. NFPA 12, 12A, 12B require 24 hours of standby and five minutes of alarm activation.
6. Factory Mutual requires Pre-action and Deluge systems to have 90 hours of battery standby and 10 minutes of alarm activation.

August 1999 A-4 76-100016-001

Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System PEGAsys

A-5 POWER SUPPLY/BATTERY CAPACITY.

The system is capable of charging batteries of various capacities up to 99 AH, refer to Table A-6 for details concerning battery
capacities and charging capabilities.
Table A-6. Battery Capacities

Maximum Available Standby Maximum Available Standby

Battery (Backup Hours) Current Amps Current Amps
(For One Power Supply) (For Two Power Supply)

12 Ah (4 hours) 2.5

17 Ah (4 hours) 3.6

33 Ah (4 hours) N/A 7.1

33 Ah (24 hours) 1.2

160 Ah (24 hours) Not Allowed for 1 Power Supply 6.0

66 Ah (24 hours) 0.9

99 Ah (60 hours) 1.4

99 Ah (60 hours) 0.9

160 Ah (90 hours) Not Allowed for 1 Power Supply 1.6

A-6 POWER REQUIREMENT EXAMPLE

The following power calculations will be based on a the system configuration listed below:
Central Control Panel (CCP) with: Field Devices:
- Central Control Module - Ten (10), Ionization Detectors
- Two (2), RX/TX Modules - Twenty (20), Photoelectric Detectors
- One (1), Power Supply Module - Ten (10), Heat Detectors
- One (1), Multi-Loop Motherboard - Six (6), Addressable Contact Input Devices
- Two (2), Signal Output Modules, with signal - Four (4), Addressable Contact Output Devices
appliances totaling .800A on each - One (1), Signaling Device, connected to MP1 of
- One (1), Output Relay Module the CCM
- One (1), Agent Release Output Module, has a
momentary control head on the releasing
circuit and signaling appliances totalling 0.5 A.
AC Branch Current Calculation Example: This example is based on the system specified in the previous paragraph. This system
current calculation is for a 120VAC main feed. Refer to Paragraph A-1 for additional information.

76-100016-001 A-5 August 1999

PEGAsys Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System

Number of Current Draw Total Current

Device Type
Devices (Amps) per Device

Control Panel 1 X 1.9 = 1.9

Auxiliary
(0) X 1.9 = 0
Power Supply

Sum column for

AC Branch Current = 1.9 Amps
required

Main Power Supply Loading Examples: This example is based on the same system as above. Refer to Paragraph
A-2 for additional information.
Standby or Non-Alarm Power Requirement Calculation

Maximum
Standby Module /
Module / Device Standby
Current(Amps) System
Current (Amps)
Central Control Module 0.070 X 1 = 0.070
RXTX module 0.035 X 2 = 0.070
Power supply Monitor 0.060 X 1 = 0.060
Auxiliary Output 1, Max 1.5A X =
Auxiliary Output 2, Max 1.5A X =
Multi-Loop Mother Board 0.035 X 1 = 0.035
Signal Audible Output Module 0.025 X 2 = 0.050
Relay Output Module 0.010 X 1 = 0.010
City Tie Output Module 0.030 X =
Agent Release Output Module 0.065 X 1 = 0.065
FIELD DEVICES
Ionization Detector 0.000400 X 10 = 0.004
Photoelectric Detector 0.000400 X 20 = 0.008
Heat Detector 0.000400 10 0.004
Addressable Contact Input 0.000310 X 6 = 0.0024
Addressable Contact Output 0.000330 X 4 = 0.0016
Loop Isolators 0.001 X =
Sum Column for
Standby Load
= 0.380 Amps

Alarm Power Requirement Calculation

August 1999 A-6 76-100016-001

Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System PEGAsys

Alarm Module / Maximum Alarm

Module / Device
Current(Amps) System Current (Amps)
Central Control Module 0.210 X 1 = 0.210
CCM MP01 and MP02 Output 0.100 X 1 = 0.100
RXTX Module 0.035 X 2 = 0.070
Power Supply Monitor 0.060 X 1 = 0.060
Auxiliary Output 1, Max 1.5A 0 X =
Auxiliary Output 2, Max 1.5A 0 X =
Multi-Loop Mother Board 0.035 X 1 = 0.035
Signal Audible Output Module 0.135 X 2 = 0.270
Signal Module Outputs 0.800 X total = 0.800
Relay Output Module 0.075 X 1 = 0.075
City Tie Output Module 0.080 X =
Agent Release Module 0.150 X 1 = 0.150
0 Using
Agent Release Output Circuits momentary X 1 = 0
device
Agent Release Module Signal Circuit .500 X 1 = 0.500
FIELD DEVICES X =
Ionization Detector 0.000440 X 10 = 0.0044
Photoelectric Detector 0.000445 X 20 = 0.0088
Heat Detector 0.000440 X 10 = 0.0044
Addressable Contact Input 0.000380 X 6 = 0.0026
Addressable Contact Output 0.000400 X 4 = 0.0018
Loop Isolators (Active) 0.007 X =
Sum Column
for Alarm = 2.292 Amps
Load

Battery Size Requirement Calculation Example: This example is based on the same system as above. Refer to Paragraph A-4
for additional information.

76-100016-001 A-7 August 1999

PEGAsys Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System

Battery Size Requirement Calculation

Total from Standby Required Standby

Power Requirement Time (4, 24, 60 or 90)
X = 9.12
Calculation hours
(0.380) (24)
Total from Alarm Required Alarm Time
Power Requirement (5 min. enter 0.084)
X = 0.1925
Calculation (10 Min. enter 0.167)
(2.292) (0.084)
Total of both sums
equals Amp Hours
= 9.312
Required
(Sum of Above)

(Derating factor) X 0.1 0.9312

Total AH Required
(Original total AH
= 10.24
required + Derating
Factor)

Example Results: The results of the prior calculations are as follows:

a. Current requirement of the 120VAC Main Feed is 1.9 Amps.
b. System Power Requirement when in Standby is 0.380 Amps.
c. System Power Requirements when in Alarm is 2.292 Amps.
d. Battery Size Requirement is 10.241 Amp-Hours. Select 12 AH batteries.

August 1999 A-8 76-100016-001

Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System PEGAsys

APPENDIX B
SYSTEM EXPANSION

The PEGAsys system is capable of substantial expansion in the

number of RX/TX loops, I/O modules and system output power. AC OUT
1 2
AC IN DC IN 1

SHR
RET
24V
N L N L G N L

The system will support up to 16 I/O modules for single loop and DS1 SHR

TB9

DC IN 2
24V

TBL RELAY
NO RET

23 I/O modules for multi-loop - a maximum of 8 of any one type of

TB8
C RET
NC

W1
module. The system power supply monitor module can super-

F1
ASHLAND, MA 01721
W2 W3
KIDDE PEGAsys

TP4
vise two power supply units (4 amps each for a total of 8 amps
+

BAT
RS485 KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.
-
S3

TP3
2
S1
1

per module) which allows for up to 64 amps of 24 VDC power.

W4
2
S2
1
A
B 24V

SYSTEM POWER
R RET

24V

MOTHER BD CCM
The following diagrams will demonstrate the available ways of
R RET

24V

RET

expanding the system.

RET
RET

24V
24V
06-129562-001 AUX 1 AUX 2

Figure B-1 shows the single loop PEGAsys system (P/N 76-
100000-501). This includes the Central Control Module (CCM),
Receiver/Transmitter (RX/TX) module, Power Supply/Charger
assembly and the system enclosure. The basic system can be
expanded as shown in the following sections

AC OUT AC IN DC IN 1
1 2
SHR
RET
24V

N L N L G N L

DS1 SHR
TB9

DC IN 2

24V
TBL RELAY

NO RET
TB8

C RET
NC
W1

F1
ASHLAND, MA 01721
W2 W3

KIDDE PEGAsys
TP4

+
BAT
RS485 KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.

-
S3
TP3

2
S1
1
W4
2
S2
1
A
B 24V
SYSTEM POWER

R RET

24V
MOTHER BD CCM

R RET

24V

RET
RET
RET

24V
24V

06-129562-001 AUX 1 AUX 2

Figure B-2. Single Loop with Motherboard

Figure B-3 shows the PEGAsys system with an auxiliary power
module (P/N 76-100009-002) installed. The auxiliary power sup-
ply module provides an additional 4 amps of 24 VDC power for
a total of 8 amps for system use. The unit would be installed if
the system required more than the base system's 4 amps of 24
VDC power. When the auxiliary module is installed the system
batteries are moved to a battery cabinet. P/N 76-100010-001 is
an UL listed battery enclosure for use with the PEGAsys.
This figure could also be a multi-loop system with the inclusion
of the multi-loop motherboard and additional RX/TX loop con-
trollers.

Figure B-1. Single Loop

Figure B-2 shows the single-loop PEGAsys system with the
optional I/O motherboard (P/N 76-100007-001) installed. The I/
O motherboard provides the system with mechanical and elec-
trical interfaces for up to eight I/O modules of any style. The I/O
modules are installed by inserting them into the desired
motherboard slot and fastening with the two screws provided.
The PEGAsys ML (Multi-loop) system (P/N 76-100000-600) looks
much the same as the system in Figure B-2 with the exception of
the multi-loop motherboard (P/N 76-100017-001) in the place of
the basic motherboard (P/N 76-100007-001). The Multi-loop
motherboard has the ability to connect up to 8 RX/TX loop con-
trollers, for a maximum of 2040 Intelligent addressable points per
system.

76-100016-001 B-1 August 1999

PEGAsys Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System

AC OUT AC IN DC IN 1
1 2

SHR
RET
24V
N L N L G N L

MOTHER BD CCM RS485 KIDDE-FENWAL, INC. ASHLAND, MA 01721

TBL RELAY

06-129562-001
W2 W3

NO
NC
C
B
A
DS1 SHR
AC OUT AC IN DC IN 1

TB9

DC IN 2
24V
1 2

SHR
RET
24V

W4
N L N L G N L

TBL RELAY
NO

N
RET

DS1
TB8

1
S2

S1

AC OUT
C

L
RET

N
NC

2
L
1
2

1
2

G
AC IN
N
L
SHR

W1
DS1

F1
24V

TB9

S3

DC IN 1
DC IN 2
RET
24V

ASHLAND, MA 01721
W2 W3
SHR

TBL RELAY
NO RET
RET

AUX 1 AUX 2
TB8
24V
C RET
KIDDE PEGAsys RET

R
TP4
24V
NC TB8 TB9
W1
+

BAT
RS485 KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.
-
S3 TP3 TP4

RET

RET

24V

SHR
RET

24V

RET

24V

RET

24V

-
+
TP3
BAT F1
SYSTEM POWER DC IN 2
2
S1
1

W1

F1
W4
2
S2
1

ASHLAND, MA 01721
A

W2 W3
B 24V

SYSTEM POWER
R RET MOTHER BD CCM RS485 KIDDE-FENWAL, INC. ASHLAND, MA 01721
TBL RELAY

06-129562-001
W2 W3
24V

MOTHER BD CCM

NO
NC
KIDDE PEGAsys

C
B
A
R RET

TP4
24V

W4

N
RET

DS1

1
S2

S1

AC OUT
L
+

N
BAT
RS485 KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.

2
-

L
1
2

1
2

G
S3

AC IN
RET

N
RET

24V
24V
TP3

L
06-129562-001 AUX 1 AUX 2
2 24V

S3

DC IN 1
S1 RET
1
SHR
RET
W4

AUX 1 AUX 2
2 24V
S2
1 RET

R
24V
TB8 TB9
W1
B 24V

SYSTEM POWER
R RET TP3 TP4

RET

RET

24V

SHR
RET

24V

RET

24V

RET

24V

-
+
BAT F1
SYSTEM POWER DC IN 2
24V

MOTHER BD CCM
R RET

24V

RET

RET
RET

24V
24V
06-129562-001 AUX 1 AUX 2

Figure B-4. Expanded Single Loop System

Figure B-5 shows an expanded PEGAsys system which is ca-
pable of having 8 I/O modules of various types and a maximum
24VDC power at 40 amps. This DC power would be hardwired
into signal and release modules whose loading would otherwise
cause more than 8 amps of 24 VDC current to be drawn from the
motherboard during activation.
The hardwire option allows the system installer to provide indi-
vidual modules with their own power source. Refer to the particu-
lar modules installation diagram in Chapter 7 and Appendix A for
Figure B-3. System with Auxiliary Power Supply Module power-supply expansion guidelines.

Figure B-4 shows an expanded single-loop PEGAsys system

which contains two motherboard assemblies, three complete
power supply assemblies (24 Amps of 24 VDC power), and up
to 16 total possible I/O modules. The I/O bus interconnections
between the two motherboards are done using 6 conductors
from the I/O bus terminal block on the motherboard in the main
enclosure to connect to the same terminal block on the
motherboard in the expansion enclosure. This connection al-
lows complete supervision of all I/O modules installed on the
second motherboard by the CCM in the main enclosure. 24 VDC
power for the motherboard in the expansion enclosure would
derive from one of the power supply assemblies installed in that
enclosure. A simple two-wire connection is all that would be
required.
The power supplies need to be tied to the I/O bus for communi-
cations purposes. To accomplish this in the above example, the
installer would use a two conductor cable to connect the RX/TX
of the I/O bus from the motherboard assembly to the power sup-
ply. The second power supply could then be daisy chained to
the first to complete the communications connections.
Auxiliary power supplies in the expansion enclosure can share
a set of batteries or could support their own set of batteries
separately.

August 1999 B-2 76-100016-001

Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System PEGAsys

AC OUT AC IN DC IN 1
1 2

SHR
RET
24V
N L N L G N L

NOTE: One main power supply/charger assembly can be

MOTHER BD CCM RS485 KIDDE-FENWAL, INC. ASHLAND, MA 01721
TBL RELAY

06-129562-001
W2 W3

NO
NC
C
SHR

B
A
DS1

TB9

DC IN 2
24V

TBL RELAY
NO RET

W4
TB8

N
DS1
C

1
RET

S2

S1

AC OUT
L
NC

N
2
L
1
2

1
2

G
AC IN
N
used to charge a common set of batteries. All other power

W1

F1

L
24V

S3

DC IN 1
ASHLAND, MA 01721
RET

W2 W3
SHR
RET

AUX 1 AUX 2
KIDDE PEGAsys
24V

TP4
RET

R
24V

+ TB8 TB9

BAT
RS485 KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.
W1
-
S3

TP3
TP3 TP4

RET

RET

24V

SHR
RET

24V

RET

24V

RET

24V

-
+
supply/charger assemblies could be connected to the com-
2 F1
S1 BAT DC IN 2
1 SYSTEM POWER

W4
2
S2
1
A
B 24V

SYSTEM POWER
R RET

24V RS485 KIDDE-FENWAL, INC. ASHLAND, MA 01721

MOTHER BD CCM
MOTHER BD CCM TBL RELAY

06-129562-001
W2 W3
R

NO
RET

NC
C
B
A
24V

RET

mon set of batteries in parallel for backup DC power only.

W4

N
DS1

1
S2

S1

AC OUT
L
N
2
L
1
2

1
2
RET
RET

24V

G
24V

AC IN
06-129562-001

N
AUX 1 AUX 2

L
24V

S3

DC IN 1
RET

SHR
RET

AUX 1 AUX 2
24V

You will also need to disable the charging circuit on the

RET

R
24V
TB8 TB9
W1

TP3 TP4

RET

RET

24V

SHR
RET

24V

RET

24V

RET

24V

-
+
BAT F1
SYSTEM POWER DC IN 2

additional power supply/charger assemblies by cutting

jumper W1. Be careful not to exceed the maximum charg-
MOTHER BD CCM RS485 KIDDE-FENWAL, INC. ASHLAND, MA 01721
TBL RELAY

06-129562-001
W2 W3

NO
NC
C
B
A

W4

N
DS1

1
S2

S1

AC OUT
L
N
2
L
1
2

1
2

G
AC IN
N
ing capacity of the main power supply.

L
24V

S3

DC IN 1
RET

SHR
RET

AUX 1 AUX 2
24V

RET

R
24V
TB8 TB9
W1

TP3 TP4

RET

RET

24V

SHR
RET

24V

RET

24V

RET

24V

-
+
BAT F1
SYSTEM POWER DC IN 2

MOTHER BD CCM RS485 KIDDE-FENWAL, INC. ASHLAND, MA 01721

TBL RELAY

06-129562-001
W2 W3

NO
NC
C
B
A

W4

N
DS1

1
S2

S1

AC OUT
L
N
2
L
1
2

1
2

G
AC IN
N
L
24V

S3

DC IN 1
RET

SHR
RET

AUX 1 AUX 2
24V

RET

R
24V
TB8 TB9
W1

TP3 TP4

RET

RET

24V

SHR
RET

24V

RET

24V

RET

24V

-
+
BAT F1
SYSTEM POWER DC IN 2

Figure B-6 shows a expanded PEGAsys system which could have

16 I/O modules and 56 amps of 24 VDC power. The figure also
displays the flexibility to bring all four power supply assemblies in
the second expansion enclosure to one set of batteries. In this
arrangement one of the four power supplies charges the batter-
ies, and all four receive standby power from the batteries. Each
power supply must have its own two conductors connected di-
rectly to the battery set to meet code requirements. The three
non-charging power supplies must have Jumper W1 cut to dis-
able their charging circuits. Refer to Chapter 7 and Appendix A
for more details on power expansion.
Figure B-7 shows an expanded PEGAsys ML system which could
have up to 8 RX/TX loop controllers and 9 I/O modules installed
in the two motherboards. The system also has a maximum 24
VDC power of 24 amps as shown in the diagram. Refer to Chap-
Figure B-5. Expanded Sys. with I/O Modules & P.S. ter 7 and Appendix A for power supply expansion guidelines.

AC OUT AC IN DC IN 1
1 2
SHR
RET
24V

N L N L G N L

MOTHER BD CCM RS485 KIDDE-FENWAL, INC. ASHLAND, MA 01721

TBL RELAY
06-129562-001

W2 W3 MOTHER BD CCM RS485 KIDDE-FENWAL, INC. ASHLAND, MA 01721

TBL RELAY
06-129562-001
NO

W2 W3
NC
C
B
A

NO
NC
C
SHR

B
A
DS1
TB9

DC IN 2

24V
W4
TBL RELAY

NO
N

RET

W4
DS1
TB8

1
S2

S1

N
AC OUT

DS1
C
L

1
RET

S2

S1

AC OUT
L
N

NC
2

N
L

2
L
1
2

1
2

G
AC IN

1
2

1
2

G
N

AC IN
N
L
W1

F1

24V

L
S3

DC IN 1

24V
RET

S3

DC IN 1
ASHLAND, MA 01721

RET
W2 W3

SHR
RET SHR
AUX 1 AUX 2

RET
AUX 1 AUX 2

24V

KIDDE PEGAsys RET 24V

R

R
TP4

24V
RET
R

TB8 TB9 24V

W1
+ TB8 TB9
BAT
RS485 KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.

W1
-
S3 TP3 TP4
RET

RET

24V

SHR
RET

24V

RET

24V

RET

24V

-
+
TP3

F1 TP3 TP4

RET
BAT

RET

24V

SHR
RET

24V

RET

24V

RET

24V

-
+

SYSTEM POWER DC IN 2
2 F1
S1 BAT DC IN 2
1 SYSTEM POWER

W4
2
S2
1
A
B 24V
SYSTEM POWER

R RET MOTHER BD CCM RS485 KIDDE-FENWAL, INC. ASHLAND, MA 01721

TBL RELAY
06-129562-001

W2 W3
24V RS485 KIDDE-FENWAL, INC. ASHLAND, MA 01721
MOTHER BD CCM

MOTHER BD CCM TBL RELAY

NO
NC

06-129562-001
C
B
A

W2 W3
R
NO

RET
NC
C
B
A

24V
W4

RET
DS1

W4
S2

S1

AC OUT
L

N
DS1

1
S2

S1

AC OUT
N

L
2
L

N
2
1
2

1
2

L
AC IN

1
2

1
2
RET

N
RET

24V

G
24V

AC IN
L

06-129562-001
N

AUX 1 AUX 2
24V
S3

DC IN 1

RET 24V
S3

DC IN 1

SHR RET
RET
AUX 1 AUX 2

SHR
24V
RET
AUX 1 AUX 2

RET
24V
R

24V RET
TB8 TB9
R

W1 24V
TB8 TB9
W1
TP3 TP4
RET

RET

24V

SHR
RET

24V

RET

24V

RET

24V

-
+

BAT F1
SYSTEM POWER DC IN 2 TP3 TP4
RET

RET

24V

SHR
RET

24V

RET

24V

RET

24V

-
+

BAT F1
SYSTEM POWER DC IN 2

MOTHER BD CCM RS485 KIDDE-FENWAL, INC. ASHLAND, MA 01721

TBL RELAY
06-129562-001

W2 W3
NO
NC
C
B
A

W4

N
DS1

1
S2

S1

AC OUT
L
N
2
L
1
2

1
2

G
AC IN
N
L

24V
S3

DC IN 1

RET

SHR
RET
AUX 1 AUX 2

24V

RET
R

24V
TB8 TB9
W1

TP3 TP4
RET

RET

24V

SHR
RET

24V

RET

24V

RET

24V

-
+

BAT F1
SYSTEM POWER DC IN 2

MOTHER BD CCM RS485 KIDDE-FENWAL, INC. ASHLAND, MA 01721

TBL RELAY
06-129562-001

W2 W3
NO
NC
C
B
A

W4

N
DS1

1
S2

S1

AC OUT
L
N
2
L
1
2

1
2

G
AC IN
N
L

24V
S3

DC IN 1

RET

SHR
RET
AUX 1 AUX 2

24V

RET
R

24V
TB8 TB9
W1

TP3 TP4
RET

RET

24V

SHR
RET

24V

RET

24V

RET

24V

-
+

BAT F1
SYSTEM POWER DC IN 2

Figure B-6. Expanded Sys. with I/O Modules & P.S.

76-100016-001 B-3 August 1999

PEGAsys Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System

Figure B-7. Expanded ML Sys. with 8 RX/TX & 9 I/O Modules

August 1999 B-4 76-100016-001

Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System PEGAsys

APPENDIX C
RELEASING APPLICATIONS

The PEGAsys system can be used for agent release, leasing. For complete details refer to the PCS users guide.
pre-action, sprinkler and deluge sprinkler control applications. The following features are supported for releasing functions,
When used with UL listed, compatible actuating and initiating with which the system will be compatible.
devices, the PEGAsys system meets the requirements of the
following standards:
NFPA 12 CO2 Extinguishing Systems (High Pressure)
C-2 ABORT
NFPA 12A HALON 1301 Extinguishing Systems
The abort function is a feature which manually stops a discharge
NFPA 13 Sprinkler Systems time delay. The PEGAsys supports four styles of aborts, as listed
in Table C-1.
NFPA 15 Water Spray Systems
NFPA 16 Foam-Water Deluge and Foam-Water Spray
Systems
NFPA 17 Dry-Chemical Extinguishing Systems
C-3 DELAY

NFPA 17A Wet-Chemical Extinguishing Systems The time delay period is an installer programmable value which
begins to count down after alarm activation of an initiating
NFPA 2001 Clean-Agent Fire Extinguishing Systems device(s) which is protecting the protected area and mapped to
the agent-release output. The time delay can be programmed
for activation after one or two alarm occurrences.

C-1 PROGRAMMING
The PEGAsys system can support up to nine independently
controlled releasing outputs (AR1 - AR8 and MP1), which are
used to control releasing functions. AR1 - AR8 are the agent
release I/O modules, which are inserted into the I/O motherboard
and MP1 is the CCM releasing output, which is optionally pro-
grammable to be a signal release output. The PCS program is
used to program the system for all functions including the re-
C-4 SOAK
The soak function is used to automatically shut off the releas-
ing solenoid at a predetermined time after the mapped inputs
activate them. It may be programmed as a 10 minute or 15 minute
soak period. This soak function is for use in NFPA 16 applica-
tions only.

Table C-1. Abort Styles

Abort Type Description

Underwriter Laboratories Delay timer continues to count down upon abort activation, and stops at 10
(UL)(Complies with UL second mark until release of abort switch. Upon release of abort switch,
864) timer resumes the countdown starting at 10 seconds.
Industrial Risk Insurers Functions in similar manner to the UL-type abort, with the only exception
(IRI)(Complies with UL that the abort will only function if held prior to the receipt of the second
864) alarm.
Operation of the abort switch, once an alarm exists, changes the delay timer
to the selected delay plus an additional 90 seconds. The timer will not start
New York City
as long as the abort switch is held. Release of the abort switch continues
the countdown from the initial value plus the 90 seconds additional delay.
Once the delay timer has started, operation of the abort switch restores the
Local Jurisdiction timer to its original value. The delay timer will not start as long as the abort
switch is held. Release of the abort switch continues the countdown.

NOTE: The abort function will not work if a time delay value is not entered in the EOC programming for the hazard. Maximum
allowable delay is 60 seconds as allowed by UL864. The abort input is not intended to be used for a service disconnect.

76-100016-001 C-1 August 1999

PEGAsys Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System

(+) (+)
PC Line PC Line
(-) (-)
In Out
PUSH / HOLD
Remote LED
(Optional)

.
10K ohms
P/N 06-129025-003
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
(+) (-) (+) (-) A B (+) (-)
PC PC PC PC SW SW LED LED

ALL TERMINALS ARE POWER LIMITED

MAX. INSTALL. TEMP. 120F

DATE OF MANUFACTURE:
FOR SERVICE SEND TO:
SmartOne TM

KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.
CAT. NO. 70-407008-001

ASHLAND, MA 01721
MODEL AI, N/O

INSTRUCTIONS
SEE INSTALLATION

06-235578-001

SUPPRESSION SYSTEM ABORT

400 MAIN ST.

Addressable Contact Monitor P/N 87875201

P/N 70-407008-001
Figure C-1. Addressable Contact Monitor Interconnection

NOTE: The 10-K ohm resistor must be connected across the abort station contacts for supervision.
Failure to install this resistor will result in a "Trouble Open" message for that monitor.

(P/N 87875201). Figure C-1 shows the interconnection of the

C-5 SPECIAL MODULE TYPES addressable contact monitor and the abort station switch.
The PEGAsys provides specific styles of devices which have
C-5.2 Manual Release Switch
special releasing functions, these devices are:
The manual release switch is an addressable contact monitor
C-5.1 Abort Switch (P/N 70-407008-001) which is programmed as an manual re-
lease input. The addressable contact monitor would be con-
The abort switch is connected to an addressable contact moni- nected to a listed manual release station such as the Kidde
tor (P/N 70-407008-001) which is programmed as an abort in- Suppression Agent Release switch (P/N 84-100007-00X). Fig-
put, with a selected abort style as explained in Table C-1. The ure C-2 shows the interconnection of the addressable contact
addressable contact monitor would be connected to a listed abort monitor and the manual release switch.
station, such as the Kidde Suppression System Abort switch

(+) (+)
PC Line PC Line FIRE FIRE
(-) (-)
In Out ALARM ALARM

Remote LED
(Optional) PUSH
.

10K ohms

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
P/N 06-129025-003
PULL
(+) (-) (+) (-) A B (+) (-)
PC PC PC PC SW SW LED LED
ALL TERMINALS ARE POWER LIMITED
MAX. INSTALL. TEMP. 120F

DATE OF MANUFACTURE:
FOR SERVICE SEND TO:
SmartOne TM

KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.
CAT. NO. 70-407008-001

ASHLAND, MA 01721
MODEL AI, N/O

INSTRUCTIONS
SEE INSTALLATION

06-235578-001

400 MAIN ST.

Addressable Contact Monitor P/N 84-100007-00X

P/N 70-407008-001

Figure C-2. Manual Release Switch

NOTE: The 10-K ohm resistor must be connected across the manual poll station contacts for supervision.
Failure to install this resistor will result in a "Trouble Open" message for that contact monitor.

August 1999 C-2 76-100016-001

Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System PEGAsys

C-6 AGENT RELEASE APPLICATIONS C-7 PRE-ACTION SPRINKLER APPLICATIONS

C-6.1 CCM Release Output Wiring
The PEGAsys system provides one output on the CCM (MP01,
Terminal TB4(A)), is fully supervised and can is defaulted as a
release output. Refer to Appendix I, Drawing No. 06-235443-
001, and to the PCS program users guide for details on the
configuration of this output.
An example of the CCM releasing circuit wiring is shown in Fig-
ure C-3. For wiring details refer to the CCM wiring diagram,
Drawing No. 06-235443-001 (Appendix I).
The PEGAsys system can be used to activate and supervise pre-
action sprinkler and deluge sprinkler systems for protection of fa-
cilities. The CCM output (MP1) and agent release output modules
(AR1 - AR8) can be programmed for use with most popular sprin-
kler solenoids.
For sprinkler applications the addressable input module P/N 70-
407008-00x can be used to monitor and supervise any of the fol-
lowing sprinkler type inputs as required for each particular
application. Inputs could be air pressure, waterflow, water level
(tank), pump running, etc. Refer to Chapter 2 for details on pro-
gramming the addressable input device for various reporting
styles.

Figure C-3. CCM Release Output, Wiring Basics

C-6.2 Release Module Output Wiring

The agent release modules which the PEGAsys system uses to
provide the release function offer one release output capable of
powering two solenoids simultaneously. Refer to Appendix I,
Drawing No. 06-235443-005, and to the PCS program users
guide for details on configuration of the release outputs along
with all other system parameters.
All wiring from the agent release module to the release device is
fully supervised, including the actual device in the circuit. Ex-
amples of the releasing circuit wiring is provided in figure C-4.
For all wiring detail refer to the Release Module wiring diagram,
drawing number 06-235443-005 (in Appendix I) for specific wir-
ing details. For a list of approved devices, refer to Table 3-2 in this
manual.

Figure C-4. Release Module, Wiring Basics

76-100016-001 C-3 August 1999

PEGAsys Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System

(THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK)

August 1999 C-4 76-100016-001

Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System PEGAsys

APPENDIX D

Space Reserved for Future Use.

76-100016-001 D-1 August 1999

PEGAsys Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System

(THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK)

August 1999 D-2 76-100016-001

Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System PEGAsys

APPENDIX E
FACTORY MUTUAL SPRINKLER REQUIREMENTS
FOR
PRE-ACTION AND DELUGE TYPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS

Initiating Circuits (RX/TX - PC line) must be configured for

E-1 GENERAL INFORMATION Style 6 wiring. Refer to Drawing No. 06-235443-002 for com-
plete RX/TX PC line wiring instructions.
PEGAsys system installation applications which require Fac-
tory Mutual (FM) approval of pre-action and deluge sprinkler Provide 90 hours of standby battery and 10 minutes of alarm
systems must conform to the following guidelines. operation. Refer to Appendix A.
Agent release output can be CCM output MP1 or I/O mod-
SmartOne Thermal Detectors, Model THD-7252, when
ule agent release module AR1 - AR8. Each output would
used must be installed at 20 Ft. spacings. The pre-alarm
be required to be configured for solenoid activation. The
and alarm setpoint ranges are as follows:
solenoid output-on time period would need to be set to ei-
Pre-alarm 80 to 155 deg F ther 90 seconds or on until reset using the PCS pro-
Alarm 135 to 155 deg F gram.

76-100016-001 E-1 August 1999

PEGAsys Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System

(THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK)

August 1999 E-2 76-100016-001

Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System PEGAsys

APPENDIX F
GLOSSARY

A fou r d ig it cod e in d icatin g th e ad d ress of a smart or ad d ressab l e d evice. 1st d ig it is

Address
th e RX/TX l oop n u mb er an d th e remain in g th ree d ig its are th e d evice n u mb er.
A d evice with th e cap ab il ity to au tomatical l y commu n icate its ad d ress an d state via a
Addressable Device
mu l tip l ex tru n k to a Cen tral Con trol Pan el .
Addressable
An ad d ressab l e d evice wh ich mon itors a stan d ard fire al arm d evice. Two d evice typ es
Contact Device
are avail ab l e: Normal l y Op en & Normal l y Cl osed .
(ACID)
AdministrativeTask Rep orts, l ists, statu s, an d oth er h ou sekeep in g fu n ction s of th e Cen tral Con trol Pan el .
A p re p rog rammed time d el ay wh ich cau ses th e system to wait for th e verification time
AlarmVerification d el ay p eriod to el ap se b efore activatin g th e p re p rog rammed al arm ou tp u ts. Meets
th e NFPA 72 - 1993 d efin ition .
Pertain in g to rep resen tation b y mean s of a con tin u ou s variab l e an d p h ysical q u an tity.
Analog
For examp l e, to d escrib e a p h ysical q u an tity su ch as vol tag e, %/ft, etc.
Analog Input
See Smart Device.
Device
Central Control An en cl osu re th at h ou ses Cen tral Con trol Mod u l e(CCM), Receiver/Tran smitter Mod u l e
Panel (RX/TX), Power Su p p l y, an d op tion al I/O Moth erb oard , Ou tp u t Mod u l es.
Th is mod u l e is th e h eart of th e system. It con tain s th e main Cen tral Processin g Un it,
Central Control
Disp l ay Assemb l y, Prog rammab l e Memory, Real Time Cl ock, Watch Dog Timer, two
M odule (CCM )
RS-232-C serial p orts, two p rog rammab l e sig n al ou tp u ts an d two Form "C" rel ays.
Digital Device A d evice with two d iscrete states, su ch as a Con tact In p u t or Rel ay Ou tp u t RCUs.
Comp u tin g p ower is d istrib u ted to th e actu al real worl d d evice. Th is red u ces th e
Distributed
commu n ication b u rd en on th e l oop , th u s p rovid in g g reater immu n ity to EMI an d RFI.
Intelligence
Al l Al arm & Preal arm d ecision s are mad e at th e d evice l evel .
Th e CPU in p h otoel ectric or ion ization d etectors measu res an d stores its d etection
smoke ch amb er val u e 256 times p er d ay. Th e CPU averag es each d ays val u es an d
stores th e d ail y averag e for 30 d ays. Th e d ail y averag e is stored in a scrol l in g
fash ion ad d in g th e fin al d ays averag e an d d rop p in g th e averag e th at is 30 d ays ol d .
Drift Compensation Th e val u es th at are stored refl ect th e u n iq u e en viron men tal con d ition th at th e d etector
exp erien ces in d ail y op eration . Th e su m of th e scrol l in g 30 d ays is u sed to estab l ish a
referen ce p oin t for smoke d etection u n d er th e u n iq u e en viron men tal con d ition s th at
th e d etector exp erien ces. Th is featu re red u ces fal se al arms from en viron men tal
in fl u en ces with ou t red u cin g sen sitivity.
Th e d isp l ay assemb l y in cl u d es: an in d icatin g 80 ch aracter al p h an u meric d isp l ay, p u sh
b u tton switch es to con trol th e system, an d in d icatin g LEDs to d isp l ay system statu s.
Display Assembly
Th e PEGAsys d isp l ay assemb l y is mou n ted on th e CCM an d it commu n icates with th e
Cen tral Con trol Mod u l e.
Event Output Th e EOC p rog rammin g al l ows comb in in g of in p u ts to ob tain th e d esired ou tp u ts. Th e
Control (EOC) EOC l an g u ag e is fl exib l e to su it most an y fire al arm / su p p ression ap p l ication .

76-100016-001 F-1 August 1999

PEGAsys Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System

Internal Identifier Symb ol s th at are u sed to n ame or id en tify a comb in ation of in p u ts.(For
(I001 - I255) examp l e 1001 + 1004= I001).
An op tion al assemb l y, l ocated in th e Cen tral Con trol Pan el , th at h as th e
cap acity for eig h t Ou tp u t Mod u l es. Typ ical Ou tp u t Mod u l es are Rel ay, Sig n al
I/O M otherboard
Au d ib l e, Ag en t Rel ease, Dig ital In p u t or Ou tp u t an d In tel l ig en t In terface
Mod u l e.
A set of b ran ch es formin g a cl osed cu rren t p ath p rovid ed th at th e omission of
Loop
an y b ran ch el imin ates th e cl osed p ath .
A d evice wh ich p rovid es p rotection ag ain st wire to wire sh ort con d ition s on th e
Loop Isolators
RX/TX PC l in e. Con forms to (NFPA Styl e 7.0)
M ulti drop Line Lin e or circu it in tercon n ectin g several d evices from a cen tral p oin t.
M ultiplex Th e u se of on e tru n k or p air of wires to commu n icate with on e or more d evices.
(Per NFPA-72) Th e PEGAsys al l ows 255 d evices to commu n icate on on e tru n k.
Smart d evices or smoke d etectors may b e ord ered with an op tion al rel ay th at
Optional Relay can con trol extern al d evices su ch as el evators an d n on -emerg en cy p rocess
con trol .
Ou tp u t Mod u l es, l ocated in th e Cen tral Con trol Pan el en cl osu re, p rovid e real
Output M odule worl d ou tp u t cap ab il ity from th e Cen tral Con trol Mod u l e. Typ ical mod u l es are:
Rel ay an d Sig n al Au d ib l e.
Memory l ocation s th at are p rog rammab l e b y th e own er to store a 40 ch aracter
Owner Locations
al p h an u meric d escrip tion of th e l ocation of th e fire d etection d evice.
Power an d commu n ication wires orig in atin g from th e RX/TX Mod u l e. Al so
PC Line
cal l ed Sig n al Lin e Circu it (SLC).
An Ou tp u t Mod u l e l ocated in th e Cen tral Con trol Pan el en cl osu re th at
in terfaces with au xil iary eq u ip men t. Each mod u l e con tain s fou r in d ivid u al
Relay Output M odule
p rog rammab l e SPDT 2 Amp 24 VDC rel ays. A total of eig h t Rel ay Ou tp u t
Mod u l es may b e u sed in th e system for a total of 32 circu its.
An ad d ressab l e or smart fiel d d evice th at p rovid es a rel ay con tact to con trol a
Relay Output RCU
d evice su ch as a fan . Typ ical l y mou n ts in a 4 in ch sq u are el ectrical b ox.
Remote Control Unit
An ad d ressab l e or smart fiel d d evice.
(RCU)
Th e Receiver / Tran smitter mod u l e is l ocated in th e Cen tral Con trol
RX/TX M odule Pan el en cl osu re an d fu n ction s as a d ata tran smission in terface b etween th e
Cen tral Con trol Mod u l e an d remote con trol u n its - (RCUs).
An ou tp u t mod u l e, l ocated in th e Cen tral Con trol Pan el en cl osu re, th at
Signal Audible Output p rovid es fou r Styl e Z or Styl e Y, 24 V, 2 Amp p ol arized sig n al circu its. Al l
M odule circu its are su p ervised for an op en or sh ort con d ition . A maximu m of eig h t
mod u l es with 32 circu its may b e in stal l ed in th e PEGAsys system.
Smart smoke d etectors (ion ization or p h otoel ectric) measu re smoke l evel every
9 secon d s with in th eir smoke sen sin g ch amb er. After in itail l y d etectin g smoke
Smart SmokeDetector th e d etector en ters an al ert state wh ere it measu res smoke con cen tration every
2 secon d s. If th e d etector d etects smoke th ree ou t of fou r samp l es, it sen d s a
p re-al arm or al arm statu s to th e Cen tral Con trol Pan el .
A d evice with th e featu res of an ad d ressab l e d evice b u t ad d ition al l y h as th e
comp u tin g p ower to make al arm d ecision s b ased on stored cal ib ration an d
Smart Device en viron men tal d ata, an d con d ition of th e d etector. Al so th e d evice tran smits
an d receives an al og val u es. Examp l es wou l d b e p h otoel ectric or ion ization
d etectors.
A d evice with ou t th e el ectron ics n ecessary to tie d irectl y to th e mu l tip l ex tru n k.
Standard Fire Alarm
It req u ires an ad d ressab l e in p u t or ad d ressab l e ou tp u t d evice to in terface with
Device
th e PEGAsys system. (ie..con ven tion al smoke an d h eat d etectors)

August 1999 F-2 76-100016-001

Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System PEGAsys

A code on the display that identifies an RCUs status. There are eight field
State programmable states a RCU may be programmed to: Alarm, Trouble, Abort,
Manual Alarm, Manual Release, WaterFlow, Supervisory and Normal.
Provides primary and secondary system power. Stand-by batteries, provide DC
System Power
voltage to the Power Supply in the event of an AC power failure. The stand-by
Supply
batteries are located in the Central Control Panel enclosure.
T-TAP See Multi drop Line. Only allowable in Style 4 configuration.
Trouble Relay A non programmable relay which operates during any system trouble condition.
A message on LCD display that identifies the type of device reporting. The
Type
message identifies Smoke & Heat detectors and Input and Output RCU devices.
Variable Identifier See Internal Identifier (I001-I255).
This timer senses abnormality in the Central Control Modules CPU. If the CPU is
M odule Watch Dog
operating normally, it periodically resets the timer. If the timer is not reset, it times
Timer
out and indicates a CPU error.
%/FT Percent of smoke obscuration per foot of light.

76-100016-001 F-3 August 1999

PEGAsys Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System

(THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK)

August 1999 F-4 76-100016-001

Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System PEGAsys

APPENDIX G
DISPLAY ABBREVIATIONS

Abbreviation Meaning Abbreviation Meaning

232 RS-232-C OF Off
A.V. Alarm Verification OK All Right
ACK Acknowledge OP Open
ADDR. Address OR Optional Relay
ALM Alarm OUT Output
AOF Alarm Off P.C. Power Communications Line
BAT. Battery P.S. Power Supply
C.L. Combinational Logic P.W. Password
CD Contact Detector Error POF Pre-alarm Off
CT City Tie PRE Pre-alarm
DISCON Disconnect PRNT Printer
DISP Panel Display PROG Program
DR Drift Error R.P. Remote Panel
EW EEPROM Write Error RTC Real Time Control
EX External Trouble RY I/O Relay Output Module
INP Input SG I/O Signal Output Module
IT Illegal RCU Type SH Short
I/O Input / Output Module SPV Supervisory
L9 Line + 9V Trouble TBL Trouble
LEV. Level TE RCU Test No Good
LV Line Voltage Trouble TOF Trouble Off
NA NOV RAM Access Error TST RCU Test
NG No good UK Unknown Device Connected
NR Not Registered VOLT. Voltage
O.L. Owner Location ZA Zone Alarm

76-100016-001 G-1 August 1999

PEGAsys Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System

(THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK)

August 1999 G-2 76-100016-001

Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System PEGAsys

APPENDIX H
INDEX
Subject Page Paragraph

A
Accessing the System Menus .......................................................................... 2-4 ................................................... 2-5.2
Active Alarm Mode ............................................................................................ 2-5 ................................................... 2-6.2
Active Supervisory Trouble Mode ..................................................................... 2-10 ................................................. 2-6.3
Active Trouble Mode ......................................................................................... 2-11 ................................................. 2-6.4
Addressable Contact Input Device Installation .................................................. 7-11 ................................................. 7-15
Addressable Contact Input Devices ................................................................. 1-5, 3-11 .......................................... 1-2.11,3-3.14
Addressable Contact Monitor Registration ....................................................... 2-14 ................................................. 2-8.7.2
Addressable Relay Output Device Installation .................................................. 7-11 ................................................. 7-16
Addressable Relay Output Devices .................................................................. 1-5, 3-12 .......................................... 1-2.12, 3-3.15
Addressing I/O Modules ................................................................................... 2-13 ................................................. 2-8.4
Addressing RCUs ............................................................................................. 2-13 ................................................. 2-8.6
Agent Release Module ...................................................................................... 3-9, 7-4 ........................................... 3-3.8, 7-7.3
Agent Release Output Module .......................................................................... 1-4 ................................................... 1-2.7.3
Alarm Mode Indications .................................................................................... 2-5 ................................................... 2-6.2.1
Alarm Mode User Action ................................................................................... 2-5 ................................................... 2-6.2.2
Alarm Simulation Test (AST) ............................................................................ 4-2 ................................................... 4-3.5
Arming Release Circuits .................................................................................. 4-3 ................................................... 4-4.2
AST Procedure ................................................................................................. 4-3 ................................................... 4-3.5.1
Audible Device .................................................................................................. 2-2 ................................................... 2-2.2

B
Basic Motherboard ........................................................................................... 1-2 ................................................... 1-2.5
Batteries ........................................................................................................... 7-6 ................................................... 7-9.2
Battery Enclosure ............................................................................................. 7-6 ................................................... 7-9.1
Battery Test ...................................................................................................... 4-1 ................................................... 4-3.3

C
Central Control Module (CCM) .......................................................................... 1-1, 3-2, 5-2 .................................... 1-2.1, 3-3.1, 5-4.2
City Tie Module ................................................................................................. 1-4, 3-10 .......................................... 1-2.7.4, 3-3.9
City Tie Output Module ..................................................................................... 7-4 ................................................... 7-7.4
Component Description .................................................................................... 1-1 ................................................... 1-2
Connecting a Printer ......................................................................................... 7-11 ................................................. 7-18.2
Connecting a Terminal or Personal Computer .................................................. 7-11 ................................................. 7-18.1
Connecting AC Power ...................................................................................... 7-6 ................................................... 7-8
Connection of Peripherals ................................................................................ 7-11 ................................................. 7-18
Control and Indicator Description ..................................................................... 2-2 ................................................... 2-2.3
Control and Indicators ...................................................................................... 2-1 ................................................... 2-2

D
Default Passwords ........................................................................................... 2-2 ................................................... 2-3.2
Detector Installation .......................................................................................... 7-10 ................................................. 7-13
Detector Registration ....................................................................................... 2-14 ................................................. 2-8.7.1
Disarming and Rearming Release Circuits ...................................................... 4-3 ................................................... 4-4
Disarming Release Circuits ............................................................................. 4-3 ................................................... 4-4.1
Display Control Card (DCC) .............................................................................2-12 ................................................. 2-8.3.3
Display Module ................................................................................................. 1-1 ................................................... 1-2.2

76-100016-001 H-1 August 1999

PEGAsys Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System

INDEX (Cont.)

Subject Page Paragraph

E
Enable/Disable RTC Program Line Numbers ................................................... 2-12 ................................................. 2-8.2.2
Entering Passwords ......................................................................................... 2-2 ................................................... 2-3.3
EOC Programming .......................................................................................... 2-11 ................................................. 2-8.1
Exiting the System Menus ................................................................................ 2-4 ................................................... 2-5.3
External Power Failure Indicator Connection .................................................... 7-10 ................................................. 7-12

F
Field Device Connection to RX/TX Module ....................................................... 7-7 ................................................... 7-10
Field Devices .................................................................................................... 3-11, 5-3 .......................................... 3-3.10, 5-4.4
Functional Descriptions .................................................................................... 3-2 ................................................... 3-3

I
Input/Output Modules ........................................................................................ 1-3 ................................................... 1-2.7
Install and Connect DC Power ......................................................................... 7-6 ................................................... 7-9
Installation Checkout ........................................................................................ 7-11 ................................................. 7-17
Installation Procedure for Central Control Panel ............................................... 7-1 ................................................... 7-3
Installation Procedure for Expansion Enclosures ............................................. 7-1 ................................................... 7-4
Installation Procedure for I/O Motherboard ....................................................... 7-2 ................................................... 7-5
Installation Procedure for RX/TX Module .......................................................... 7-2 ................................................... 7-6
Installation Procedure for I/O Module ................................................................ 7-3 ................................................... 7-7
Intelligent Loop Devices .................................................................................... 1-4 ................................................... 1-2.9
Isolate Menu Function ....................................................................................... 2-4 ................................................... 2-5.4.1

L
Lamp Test ......................................................................................................... 4-1 ................................................... 4-3.1
LCD Display ..................................................................................................... 2-1 ................................................... 2-2.1
Levels of Security ............................................................................................. 2-2 ................................................... 2-3.1
List Menu Function ........................................................................................... 2-4 ................................................... 2-5.4.2
Listing all Registered RCUs .............................................................................2-15 ................................................. 2-8.7.4
Listing EOC Programming ...............................................................................2-12 ................................................. 2-8.1.1
Listing I/O Module Assignment ......................................................................... 2-13 ................................................. 2-8.5.1
Listing RTC Programming ................................................................................2-12 ................................................. 2-8.2.1
Loop Device Test .............................................................................................. 4-1 ................................................... 4-3.2
Loop Isolator Devices ....................................................................................... 1-6 ................................................... 1-2.14
Loop Isolator Devices ....................................................................................... 3-12 ................................................. 3-3.17

M
Maintenance Procedures ................................................................................. 4-1 ................................................... 4-3
Materials Required for Installation ..................................................................... 7-1 ................................................... 7-2
Menu Functions ................................................................................................ 2-4 ................................................... 2-5.4
Menu Structure ................................................................................................. 2-4 ................................................... 2-5.1
Mode of Operation ............................................................................................ 2-1 ................................................... 2-1.1
Model DH-2000 Air Duct Housing ..................................................................... 1-5, 3-12 .......................................... 1-2.13, 3-3.16
Modes of Operation .......................................................................................... 2-5 ................................................... 2-6
Multi-Loop Motherboard .................................................................................... 1-3, 3-6 ........................................... 1-2.6, 3-3.5

August 1999 H-2 76-100016-001

Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System PEGAsys

INDEX (Cont.)

Subject Page Paragraph

N
Normal Standby Mode ...................................................................................... 2-5 ................................................... 2-6.1

O
Output Signal Connection ................................................................................. 7-9 ................................................... 7-11
Overall Block Diagram Description .................................................................. 3-1 ................................................... 3-2

P
Parts List .......................................................................................................... 6-1 ................................................... 6
Power-Down Procedure ................................................................................... 4-3 ................................................... 4-5.1
Power-Down System ....................................................................................... 4-3 ................................................... 4-5
Power-Up Procedure ........................................................................................ 4-4 ................................................... 4-6.1
Power-Up System ............................................................................................ 4-4 ................................................... 4-6
Power Checks .................................................................................................. 5-1 ................................................... 5-2.2
Power Supply Communication Connections .................................................... 7-6 ................................................... 7-7.7
Power Supply/Charger Assembly ..................................................................... 1-2, 7-4 ........................................... 1-2.4, 7-7.5
Power Supply/Charger Assembly, Expansion Enclosure ................................. 7-4 ................................................... 7-7.6
Power Supply/Charger Assembly, Revision A .................................................. 3-4 ................................................... 3-3.3
Power Supply/Charger Assembly, Revision C .................................................. 3-5 ................................................... 3-3.4
Printing Operation ............................................................................................. 2-11 ................................................. 2-7

R
Receiver/Transmitter (RX/TX) Module .............................................................. 1-2, 3-3 ........................................... 1-2.3, 3-3.2
Registering I/O Module Assignments ............................................................... 2-13 ................................................. 2-8.5
Registering RCUs ............................................................................................2-14 ................................................. 2-8.7
Relay Output Module ........................................................................................ 1-3, 3-8, 7-4 .................................... 1-2.7.2, 3-3.7,
.................................................................................................................................................................................. 7-7.2
Remote Control Unit (RCU) ............................................................................. 2-12 ................................................ 2-8.3.2
Remote Relay Registration .............................................................................. 2-15 ................................................ 2-8.7.3
Removal and Replacement ............................................................................. 5-2 .................................................. 5-4
Required Tools ................................................................................................ 5-2 .................................................. 5-4.1
RTC Programming ........................................................................................... 2-12 ................................................ 2-8.2
RX/TX Loops .................................................................................................... 2-13 ................................................ 2-8.3.4
RX/TX Module ................................................................................................. 5-2 .................................................. 5-4.3

S
Scheduled Maintenance .................................................................................. 4-1 .................................................. 4-2
Set Menu Function .......................................................................................... 2-4 .................................................. 2-5.4.3
Setting and Adjusting Smoke & Heat Detector Sensitivities ........................... 7-10 ................................................ 7-14
Setting and Adjusting Smoke & Heat Detector Sensitivity Procedure ............ 7-10 ................................................ 7-14.1
Signal Audible Output Module ......................................................................... 7-3 .................................................. 7-7.1
Signal Output Module ...................................................................................... 1-3, 3-7 ........................................... 1-2.7.1, 3-3.6
SmartOne Detector Bases ............................................................................... 1-5 .................................................. 1-2.10
SmartOne Heat Detectors ............................................................................... 1-5, 3-11 ......................................... 1-2.9.3, 3-3.13
SmartOne Ionization Detectors ........................................................................ 1-4, 3-11 ......................................... 1-2.9.1, 3-3.11
SmartOne Photoelectric Detectors .................................................................. 1-5, 3-11 ......................................... 1-2.9.2, 3-3.12
Standard Fault Isolation Techniques ............................................................... 5-1 .................................................. 5-2
Standby Batteries ............................................................................................ 1-4 .................................................. 1-2.8
Supervisory Trouble Mode Indication .............................................................. 2-10 ................................................ 2-6.3.1

76-100016-001 H-3 August 1999

PEGAsys Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System

INDEX (Cont.)

Subject Page Paragraph

Supervisory Trouble Mode User Action .............................................................2-10 ................................................. 2-6.3.2

System Components ....................................................................................... 1-1 ................................................... 1-1.2
System Description .......................................................................................... 1-1 ................................................... 1-1.1
System I/O Modules .........................................................................................2-13 ................................................. 2-8.3.5
System Inputs ...................................................................................................2-12 ................................................. 2-8.3.1
System Menus .................................................................................................. 2-4 ................................................... 2-5
System Outputs ...............................................................................................2-13 ................................................. 2-8.3.4
System Power-Up ............................................................................................ 2-2 ................................................... 2-4
System Programming ...................................................................................... 2-11 ................................................. 2-8
System Security ............................................................................................... 2-2 ................................................... 2-3
System Specification ........................................................................................ 1-6 ................................................... 1-3

T
Test Menu Function .......................................................................................... 2-4 ................................................... 2-5.4.4
Trouble Mode Indications .................................................................................. 2-11 ................................................. 2-6.4.1
Trouble Mode User Action ................................................................................. 2-11 ................................................. 2-6.4.2
Troubleshooting ................................................................................................ 5-1 ................................................... 5-3
Troubleshooting and Corrective Maintenance ................................................... 5-1 ................................................... 5
Types of Inputs and Outputs .............................................................................2-12 ................................................. 2-8.3

U
Un-registering RCUs ........................................................................................ 2-15 ................................................. 2-8.7.5

V
Visual Inspection .............................................................................................. 5-1 ................................................... 5-2.1

W
Walk Test .......................................................................................................... 4-2 ................................................... 4-3.4
Walk Test Procedure ........................................................................................ 4-2 ................................................... 4-3.4.2
Walk Testing Detectors .................................................................................... 4-2 ................................................... 4-3.4.1
Wiring the RX/TX PC Line ................................................................................ 7-7 ................................................... 7-10.1

August 1999 H-4 76-100016-001

Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System PEGAsys

APPENDIX I
SYSTEM DRAWINGS

This appendix provides installation diagrams and instructions for various PEGAsys system modules.

COMPONENT DRAWING No. PAGE No.

Central Control Module 06-235443-001 I-2
Receiver/Transmitter Module 06-235443-002 I-6
Power Supply Module (Revision XC) 06-235443-003 I-8
Power Supply Module (Revision AC) 06-235443-003 I-9
Agent Release Module 06-235443-005 I-11
Signal Audible Module 06-235443-006 I-14
Relay Output Module 06-235443-007 I-17
City Tie Module 06-235443-008 I-18
Basic I/O Motherboard 06-235443-011 I-20
Multi-Loop Motherboard 06-235443-012 I-22
Addressable Input Device 06-234563-001 I-24
Addressable Output Device 06-234563-001 I-25
Addressable Input Device New Design I-26
Addressable Output Device New Design I-27

76-100016-001 I-1 August 1999

August 1999

PEGAsys
SOUNDER 1 SOUNDER 2 VOLT FREE RELAYS V/F RELAY

REP 1

REP 2
A B A B 1 2 FAULT
- + - + - + - + NO NC C NO NC C NO NC C

TB4 TB5 TB1 TB2 TB3

DISPLAY ASSEMBLY

SEE NOTE 1

CCM RESET JP4 JP3

BUTTOM SEE NOTE 1

JP1
SW1
SEE NOTE 1

IC1
JP2

PORT
JK5

I/O
TO I/O MODULES AN
BT1 POWER SUPPLIES

RX/TX
PORT
JK2 JK3 JK4
I-2

JK1 PLG2
TB6
1 TO RX/TX
LOOP

SUPPLY
CONTROLLER

EARTH
DISP PRINT P.C. 24V 5V 0V

FLT
5V 0V

FLT
PLG1

24V
0V
PORT PORT PORT DISPLAY

TO REMOTE PC
FOR PROGRAMMING

Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System

TO EXTERNAL PRINTER OR INTELLIGENT GRAPHIC ANNUNCIATOR
24VDC FROM
POWER SUPPLY

PROCESSOR
1 of 4
SHEET
AD
REVISION
06-235443-001
DRAWING No.
(PEGAsys)
Display & Control Assembly
Installation Wiring Diagram CCM/
TITLE

PORT DISPLAY RESET

SW1
PLG2

PLG6

PLG3
PLG1

PLG2

TB6
JK1

JK2

JK3
76-100016-001

DISPLAY PORT 24VDC FROM

POWER SUPPLY
 NOTES:
76-100016-001

Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System

1. JUMPER ARRANGEMENTS FOR SOUNDER 1

SIGNAL SOUNDER AGENT RELEASE

JP1 ON OFF
JP2 OFF ON
8. RELEASING OUTPUT DEVICES
JP3 ON OFF
JP4 OFF ON
SOLENOIDS

890181
2. SOUNDER/RELEASE CIRCUITS ARE RATED AT 24VDC, 2A POWER LIMITED.
SUPERVISORY CURRENT - 2.4mA/CIRCUIT 899175
895630
3. ALL RELAY OUTPUTS (VOLT/FREE RELAYS AND V/F RELAY) ARE RATED 897494
AT 30VDC, 1A.
486500
4. SIGNAL OUTPUT REQUIRE THE USE OF END OF LINE RESISTOR (EOR) - 486500-01
10K, 0.5W; NOT SUPPLIED WITH PANEL. FM GROUPS
AVAILABLE AS PART NO. 06-129520-001 (KIT OF 50). SPRINKLER
5. IF MP01 IS CONFIGURED AS A RELEASING OUTPUT, SOLENOIDS
A 220 OHM (5W MIN.) RESISTOR COULD BE USED TO SIMULATE A,B,D,E,G
THE CIRCUIT IF NO SOLENOID IS CONNECTED.
CAUTION: DO NOT USE RESISTOR IF SOLENOID IS CONNECTED. 9. FOR SPECIFIC SIGNAL DEVICE INFORMATION
REFER TO FENWAL DATA SHEETS
6. TO GUARANTEE THE REQUIRED VOLTAGE AT THE RELEASING DEVICE, THE 75.XXX
FOLLOWING TABLE SHALL BE USED.

EX: TO DETERMINE THE TOTAL LOOP LENGTH, MEASURE THE DISTANCE

BETWEEN THE CONTROL HEAD AND THE CONTROL PANEL TERMINAL S - FOR SUPERVISED CIRCUITS.
BLOCK, THEN MULTIPLY BY TWO.

WIRE LENGTH (FT.) L - FOR POWER LIMITED CIRCUITS.

DEVICE PART NO.
12 AWG 14 AWG 16 AWG 18 AWG
I-3

890181 300 200 120

899175 300 200 120
895630 300 200 120
897494 380 240 150
486500 3000 2000 1200 800 POSITION OF RELAY OUTPUTS DURING NORMAL STANDBY MODE.
486500-01 3000 2000 1200 800
RELEASING
FM A 1440 760 480 340 VOLT FREE RELAYS FAULT RELAY
SOLENOID B,D 940 500 300 220 (PROGRAMMABLE)
E,G 1570 760 525 370 V / F RELAY
GROUP
MAXIMUM OF ONE #12 AWG WIRE PER TERMINAL. FAULT
NO NC C TB1, TB2 NO NC C TB3
7. RELEASING OUTPUT DEVICES SPECIFICATION
2 of 4
SHEET
AD
REVISION
06-235443-001
DRAWING No.
(PEGAsys)
Display & Control Assembly
Installation Wiring Diagram CCM/
TITLE

DEVICE I max. RESISTANCE (min.) "ON" TIME

890181 2.4 A 10 OHM MOMENTARY NOTE: THE TROUBLE RELAY CONTACTS

ARE SHOWN IN THE UNPOWERED STATE.
899175 2.4 A 10.8 OHM MOMENTARY
895630 2.0 A 12 OHM MOMENTARY
897494 1.5 A 15.9 OHM CONTINUOUS
486500 240 mA 103 OHM CONTINUOUS
486500-01 240 mA 103 OHM CONTINUOUS
FM A 458 mA 52 OHM CONTINUOUS
SOLENOID B,D 700 mA 34 OHM CONTINUOUS
GROUP E,G 420 mA 57 OHM CONTINUOUS

PEGAsys
August 1999
PEGAsys Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System

TITLE
Installation Wiring Diagram CCM/
Display & Control Assembly
(PEGAsys)
DRAWING No.
06-235443-001
REVISION
AD
SHEET
3 of 4

August 1999 I-4 76-100016-001

Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System PEGAsys

TITLE
Installation Wiring Diagram CCM/
Display & Control Assembly
(PEGAsys)
DRAWING No.
06-235443-001
REVISION
AD
SHEET
4 of 4

76-100016-001 I-5 August 1999

 24 VDC
(RED)

August 1999
24 VDC
PEGAsys

FROM POWER
RET SUPPLY NOTES:
MODULE (BLK) SMART DETECTORS USED:
1. SMART DEVICES MAY UTILIZE T-TAP WIRING METHOD IN PRODUCT NO'S. 70-401001-000 70-402001-100
RS232 PORT
FOR COMMUNICATION STYLE 4 CONFIGURATION ONLY. 70-401004-000 71-402001-100
WITH CCM. 2. MAXIMUM OF 255 LOOP DEVICES PER RX/TX 71-401001-000 70-404001-100
LOOP. ANY COMBINATION OF DEVICE TYPE 71-401004-000 70-403001-XXX
IS ACCEPTABLE.
3. MAXIMUM 20 LOOP ISOLATORS EXCLUDING ONE ON RX/TX CONTACT INPUT DEVICES:
CAN BE INSTALLED ON PC LINE. NO MORE THAN 30 LOOP
PRODUCT NO'S. 70-407002-00X
DEVICES BETWEEN TWO ADJACENT LOOP ISOLATORS.
70-407003-001
STYLE 6 (4-WIRE) PC LINE CONFIGURATION IS RECOMMENDED
70-407004-001
TO FULLY UTILIZE LOOP ISOLATION FUNCTION. 70-407008-001
J1 4. ARRANGEMENTS FOR PC LINE WIRING 70-407008-002
J2
JUMPER STYLE 4 STYLE 6 STYLE 6 w/LOOP ISO. STYLE 7 RELAY OUTPUT DEVICES:
SEE NOTE 4 W1 & W2 OPEN SHORTED SHORTED SHORTED PRODUCT NO.'S 70-408002-000
W1 W2 70-408003-000
JP2 IN IN OPEN OUT 70-408004-001

JP3 IN IN OPEN OUT LOOP ISOLATORS:

PRODUCT NO.'S
4.1- STYLE SEVEN (7) REQUIRES THE USE OF LOOP RXTX 74-200012-001

RX/TX
ISOLATORS, THE RXTX MODULE REQUIRES THE USE ELECT. BOX 74-200012-002
OF ONE (1) P/N 74-200012-001 ISOLATOR MODULE BASE MOUNT 74-200012-004
RX/TX TO OPERATE IN THE STYLE 7 CONFIGURATION.

76-100005-001
4.2- WHEN LOOP ISOLATOR USED: ANALASER INTERFACE MODULE
PLUG IN THE LOOP ISOLATOR (RXTX) 74-200012-001 PRODUCT NO. 89-100081-001
AND INTERCONNECT IT USING FLEX CABLES TO J3 ON
CPU RESET LED1
RXTX. MAKE SURE THAT UNEVEN PINS ARE
PC LINE NORMAL LED2 INTERCONNECTED.
LOOP ISOLATOR
RX/TX
5. MAXIMUM OF ONE #12 AWG WIRE PER TERMINAL.
CPU RESET SW1

(OPTIONAL)

SHORT-1
SIGNALING LINE CIRCUIT CHARACTERISTICS
PC LINE RESET SW2 LOOP ISOLATOR

I-6
KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.
ASHLAND, MA 01721
74-200012-001 MAX VOLTAGE: 26.4 VDC
1
MIN. VOLTAGE: 19.0 VDC
T1 T1 MAX. LINE CAPACITANCE: 1.0 uF

SHORT-2
J3
MAX. LINE RESISTANCE: 26.0 OHMS

1 2 3 4
MAX. NUMBER OF RCU'S: 255
JP3 JP2 MAX. RIPPLE VOLTAGE: 100 mV RMS
12

J3
LED 1 - RED LED INDICATES RXTX RESET WHEN ON.
LED 2 - GREEN LED INDICATES NORMAL OPERATION OF RXTX PC LINE
TRANSMITTER WHEN BLINKING.
SEE NOTE 4 SW 1 - CPU RESET.
SW 2 - PC LINE REST / DISCONNECT 24V FROM TERM. 2 & 3.

RX/TX ASSEMBLY
74-200005-001

AC

1 of 2
TITLE

SHEET
REVISION
(PEGAsys)
DRAWING No.
06-235443-002
Installation Wiring Diagram
Receiver/Transmitter Module

76-100016-001
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System PEGAsys

TITLE
Installation Wiring Diagram
Receiver/Transmitter Module
(PEGAsys)
DRAWING No.
06-235443-002
REVISION
AC
SHEET
2 of 2

76-100016-001 I-7 August 1999

PEGAsys Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System

TITLE
Installation Wiring Diagram
Power Supply
(PEGAsys)
DRAWING No.
06-235443-003
REVISION
XC
SHEET
1 of 1

August 1999 I-8 76-100016-001

Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System PEGAsys

TITLE
Installation Wiring Diagram
Power Supply
(PEGAsys)
DRAWING No.
06-235443-003
REVISION
AC
SHEET
1 of 2

76-100016-001 I-9 August 1999

PEGAsys Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System

BLK/WHT
WHT

ORN
RED
RED
BLK
BLK
VIO
VIO
BLK

MAIN POWER SUPPLY

BLK
RED

AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLY

SPV
RED

DC IN 2

RET
ORN

24V

SHARE

SPV
DC IN 1

RET
BLK/WHT

24V
G
AC IN
N
WHT

L
L
2
AC OUT
N
L
1
N

TITLE
Installation Wiring Diagram
Power Supply
(PEGAsys)
DRAWING No.
06-235443-003
REVISION
AC
SHEET
2 of 2

August 1999 I-10 76-100016-001

Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System PEGAsys

TITLE
Installation Wiring Diagram
Release Module
(PEGAsys)
DRAWING No.
06-235443-005
REVISION
AD
SHEET
1 of 3

76-100016-001 I-11 August 1999

 SOLENOID PART NO. 890181 AND 895630 SOLENOID PART NO. 897494
(U.L. LISTED) (U.L. LISTED)

August 1999
SINGLE SOLENOID TWO SOLENOIDS
SINGLE TB1 DAUL TB1 TB1 TB1
PEGAsys

1 1 1 1
CONTROL HEAD CONTROL HEAD
L
S 2
2 3 2 2 2 AUXILARY POWER
S
L + + + + CONNECTION
L
3 3 3 3
S 1 TB1
CKT #1 CKT #1 L CKT #1 +24V
- - - - 1
2 4 2 4 4 4
3 S 3 S
S L
+ + + +
5 5 5 5 2
L RET.
CKT #2 CKT #2 CKT #2 NOTE:
1 - 1 - - - JUMPERS W1 & W2 TO BE REMOVED
6 6 6 6
WHEN AUXILARY POWER USED.

NOTES:
NOTES:
1. SWITCH S1 AT "SOL" POSITION. SWITCH S3,1 TO "OFF ".
1. SWITCH S1 AT "SOL" POSITION. SWITCH S3,1 TO "OFF ".
2. MAXIMUM CIRCUIT WIRING RESISTANCE
2. MAXIMUM CIRCUIT WIRING RESISTANCE IS TO BE 0.6 OHMS. IS TO BE 0.7 OHMS.

SOLENOID PART NO. 899175 SOLENOID PART NO. 486500, 486500-01 SIGNAL CIRCUITS
(U.L. LISTED)

SINGLE SOLENOID TWO SOLENOIDS SINGLE SOLENOID TWO SOLENOIDS

TB1 TB1 TB1 TB1 TB1 S L
-
1 1 1 1 7
MICROSWITCH -
CKT #1 10K EOR
L

S L 2 S L 2 2 2 8
S + S L
BLK + BLK + RED + +
BLU 3 BLU 3 3 RED
3 9
L -

I-12
CKT #1 CKT #2 10K EOR
YEL - YEL - - BLK -
WHT 4 WHT 4 4 4 10
S
+ S L
+ + + +
BLK
5 BLU 5 5 RED
5 11
SOLENOID -
SAFETY FUSE CKT #2 CKT #2 10K EOR
- YEL - BLK - BLK -
6 WHT 6 6 6 12
+
S L
S L NOTES:
1. SWITCH S1 AT "SOL" POSITION. SWITCH S3,1 TO "OFF ".
NOTES: 2. MAXIMUM CIRCUIT WIRING RESISTANCE
1. SWITCH S1 AT "SOL" POSITION. SWITCH S3,1 TO "OFF ". IS TO BE 6.0 OHMS.

2. MAXIMUM CIRCUIT WIRING RESISTANCE IS TO BE 0.6 OHMS.

AD

2 of 3
TITLE

SHEET
REVISION
(PEGAsys)
DRAWING No.
06-235443-005
Release Module
Installation Wiring Diagram

76-100016-001
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
76-100016-001
FM GROUP SPRINKLER SOLENOIDS

GROUP A GROUP B,D

(U.L. LISTED) (U.L. LISTED)

SINGLE SOLENOID TWO SOLENOIDS SINGLE SOLENOID TWO SOLENOIDS

TB1 TB1 TB1 TB1
1 1 1 1
L
L
2 2 2 2
S S
+ + + +
3 3 3 3
L
CKT #1 CKT #1 L CKT #1
- - - -
4 4 4 4
S S
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System

S L
+ +
5 5
CKT #2
- -
6 6
S L
+ +
5 5
CKT #2 CKT #2
- -
6 6

NOTES:
NOTES:
1. SWITCH S1 AT "SOL" POSITION. SWITCH S3,1 TO "OFF ".
1. SWITCH S1 AT "SOL" POSITION. SWITCH S3,1 TO "OFF ".
2. MAXIMUM CIRCUIT WIRING RESISTANCE
2. MAXIMUM CIRCUIT WIRING RESISTANCE IS TO BE 2.3 OHMS. IS TO BE 1.5 OHMS.

I-13
GROUP E,G
(U.L. LISTED)

SINGLE SOLENOID TWO SOLENOIDS

TB1 TB1
1 1

L
2 2
S
+ +
3 3
L CKT #1
- -
S
4 4

AD
+ +
5 5

3 of 3
TITLE
CKT #2
- -

SHEET
6 6
S L

REVISION
(PEGAsys)
NOTES:
1. SWITCH S1 AT "SOL" POSITION. SWITCH S3,1 TO "OFF ".
2. MAXIMUM CIRCUIT WIRING RESISTANCE

DRAWING No.
06-235371-005
Release Module
IS TO BE 2.5 OHMS.

Installation Wiring Diagram

August 1999
PEGAsys
August 1999

PEGAsys
NOTES:

1. MAXIMUM OUTPUT CURRENTS:

SIGNAL CIRCUIT - 2.0 A
06-129569-001 SIGNAL AUDIBLE MODULE
SUPERVISORY CURRENT - 2.4 mA/CIRCUIT
2. NOMINAL VOLTAGE 24.0 VDC
3. SIGNAL OUTPUT REQUIRE THE USE OF END OF LINE
RESISTOR (EOR) - 10K, 0.5W; NOT SUPPLIED WITH
ON PANEL. AVAILABLE AS PART NO. 06-129520-001
RESET SWITCH SEE NOTE 4 (KIT OF 50).

1 2 1 2 1 2
TROUBLE LED MODULE ADDRESS ASSIGNMENT
4. MODULE ADDRESS ASSIGNMENT

76-100003-001
SIG. AUD.
SEE NOTE 5 MODULE SWITCH POSITION
ADDRESS SW2,2 SW1,1 SW1,2
1 ON ON ON
2 ON ON OFF
3 ON OFF ON
4 ON OFF OFF
5 OFF ON ON
6 OFF ON OFF
I-14

AUXILIARY 1 7 OFF OFF ON

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

1
POWER 8 OFF OFF OFF
NOT USED
5. EITHER SOUNDER OUTPUT (2) MAY BE CONFIGURED
FOR EITHER 2 STYLE "Y" OR 1 STYLE "Z", USING
TB1 JUMPER AND DIP SWITCH SETTINGS SHOWN ON SHEETS 2 & 3.
SOUNDER SEE NOTE 8 6. FOR SPECIFIC SIGNAL DEVICE INFORMATION
CIRCUITS
REFER TO FENWAL DATA SHEETS 75.XXX
1-4
ONLY POLARIZED SIGNALLING DEVICES TO BE USED.

Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System

12

12 7. S - FOR SUPERVISED CIRCUITS

KIDDE-FENWAL, INC. ASHLAND, MA 01721 L - FOR POWER LIMITED CIRCUITS

1 of 3
SHEET
AC
REVISION
06-235443-006
DRAWING No.
(PEGAsys)
Signal Audible Module
Installation Wiring Diagram
TITLE

8. JUMPERS W9 & W10 MUST BE CUT OUT

WHEN AUXILIARY POWER INPUT IS USED.

9. MAXIMUM OF 8 MODULES PER SYSTEM.

10. MAXIMUM OF ONE #12 AWG WIRE PER TERMINAL.

76-100016-001
 4 STYLE "Y" 2 STYLE "Y" AND 1 STYLE "Z"
76-100016-001

Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System

TB1 TB1

5 5
- -
L S L S CIRCUIT 1 L S L S CIRCUIT 1
6 6
10K 10K - 10K 10K -
CIRCUIT 2 CIRCUIT 2
EOR EOR EOR EOR
7 7
+ +

8 8
+ +

9 9
- -
L S L S CIRCUIT 3 CIRCUIT 3
10 10
10K 10K - 10K -
CIRCUIT 4 L S
EOR EOR EOR
11 11
+ +

12 12
+ +

JUMPERS SWITCHES JUMPERS SWITCHES

W1 W2 W3 W4 W5 W6 W7 W8 SW2,1 SW3,2 W1 W2 W3 W4 W5 W6 W7 W8 SW2,1 SW3,2
ON ON ON OFF ON ON ON OFF ON ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF
I-15

AUXILIARY POWER CONNECTION

TB1

+24VDC
1
AUXILIARY
2 of 3
SHEET
AC
REVISION
06-235443-006
DRAWING No.
(PEGAsys)
Signal Audible Module
Installation Wiring Diagram
TITLE

POWER RET
2

PEGAsys
August 1999
 2 STYLE "Z" 1 STYLE "Z" AND 2 STYLE "Y"
August 1999

PEGAsys
TB1 TB1
L S
5 5
- -
CIRCUIT 1 CIRCUIT 1
6 6
10K - 10K -
L S EOR EOR
7 7
+ +

8 8
+ +

9 9
- -
CIRCUIT 3 L S L S CIRCUIT 3
10 10K 10K 10
10K - -
L S EOR EOR EOR CIRCUIT 4
11 11
+ +

12 12
+ +
I-16

JUMPERS SWITCHES JUMPERS SWITCHES

W1 W2 W3 W4 W5 W6 W7 W8 SW2,1 SW3,2 W1 W2 W3 W4 W5 W6 W7 W8 SW2,1 SW3,2
OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON OFF OFF ON

Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System

3 of 3
SHEET
AC
REVISION
06-235443-006
DRAWING No.
(PEGAsys)
Signal Audible Module
Installation Wiring Diagram
TITLE
76-100016-001
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System PEGAsys

RELAY
76-10004-001

TITLE
Installation Wiring Diagram
Relay Output Module
(PEGAsys)
DRAWING No.
06-235443-007
REVISION
AB
SHEET
1 of 1

76-100016-001 I-17 August 1999

PEGAsys Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System

CITY TIE
76-100002-001

TITLE
Installation Wiring Diagram
City Tie Module
(PEGAsys)
DRAWING No.
06-235443-008
REVISION
AB
SHEET
1 of 2

August 1999 I-18 76-100016-001

Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System PEGAsys

TITLE
Installation Wiring Diagram
City Tie Module
(PEGAsys)
DRAWING No.
06-235443-008
REVISION
AB
SHEET
2 of 2

76-100016-001 I-19 August 1999

August 1999

PEGAsys
I/O MOTHER BOARD
J9
J1 J2 J3 J4 J5 J6 J7 J8 RS-485

Rv2
R1 JP1
Rv1

COM. TBL.
COM. ALM.
SIG. GND
485A
C 485B
Tb1

RET

KIDDE-FENWAL, INC. +24V

Tb2
ASHLAND, MA 01721

NOTE: 1. USE RED WIRES FOR +24VDC AND BLACK FOR RET.

2. JUMPER JP1 SHOULD BE IN. MAKE SURE THAT JUMPER

W4 ON POWER SUPPLY CONTROL BOARD IS OUT.

1. POWER CONNECTIONS:1.

1). TB1 BRINGS 24VDC POWER FROM POWER SUPPLY

TB5 OR TB6 TERMINAL BLOCKS.

2). 24VDC POWER TO RX/TX MODULES (J1) FROM TB5 OR TB6 ON POWER SUPPLY.

3). TERMINAL TB1 CAN BE USED TO BRING POWER TO I/O MODULES IN THE AUXILIARY BOX.

2. COMMUNICATIONS:
I-20

1). J9 CONNECTS TO CCM PORT AND PROVIDES I/O MODULES WITH RS485 COMMUNICATIONS.

2). J1 THROUGH J8 TO BE USED TO PLUG IN I/O MODULES AND SUPPLY THEM WITH +24VDC
POWER AND RS485 COMMUNICATIONS.

3). RS232 COMMUNICATIONS FOR RX/TX MODULE TO BE PROVIDED THROUGH PHONE CABLE
PLUGGED INTO "RX/TX" PORT ON CCM.

Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System

4). TB2 TO BE USED TO INTERCONNECT TO AUXILIARY PANELS' MOTHER BOARD AND POWER
SUPPLIES TO PROVIDE RS485 COMMUNICATIONS.
1 of 2
SHEET
AB
REVISION
06-235443-011
DRAWING No.
(PEGAsys)
Basic I/0 Motherboard
Installation Wiring Diagram
TITLE
76-100016-001
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System PEGAsys

TO POWER SUPPLY
TO CCM I/O PORT
TO CCM RX/TX PORT

/TX E
RXDUL
MO
LE
O DU
I/O
M

TITLE
Installation Wiring Diagram
Basic I/0 Motherboard
(PEGAsys)
DRAWING No.
06-235443-011
REVISION
AB
SHEET
2 of 2

76-100016-001 I-21 August 1999

 MULTILOOP CONTROLLER/MOTHERBOARD

RS232

August 1999
RET
PEGAsys

+24V

RET
+24V
RET
+24V
RET
+24V
RET
+24V
RET
+24V
RET
+24V
RET
+24V
RET
+24V RS485

COM. TBL.

COM. ALM.

SIG. GND

485A

485B

RET
I/O
MODULES

+24V
KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.
ASHLAND, MA 01721

NOTE: 1. USE RED WIRES FOR +24VDC AND BLACK FOR RET.

2. INSTALL THE W1 JUMPER IF THE MOTHERBOARD IS HOOKED AS THE

LAST DEVICE ON THE RS-485 I/O BUS, REMOVE THE JUMPER OTHERWISE.

3. THE FIRST RX/TX MODULE (LOOP #1) SHOULD BE ALWAYS ON

THE FAR RIGHT AND INTERCONNECTED TO JP1 AND TB1. ALL
CONSECUTIVE RX/TX MODULES SHOULD BE PLUGGED FROM
RIGHT TO LEFT STARTING FROM THE FIRST RX/TX.
(CONNECTOR NUMBER IS ASSOCIATED WITH LOOP NUMBER).

1. POWER CONNECTIONS:1.

1). TB9 AND TB11 BRING 24VDC POWER FROM

POWER SUPPLY TB5 AND TB6.

I-22
2). TB1 THROUGH TB8 TO BE USED TO CONNECT 24VDC POWER TO RX/TX MODULES (J1).

3). TERMINAL TB9 CAN BE USED TO BRING POWER TO I/O MODULES IN THE AUXILIARY BOX.

2. COMMUNICATIONS:

1). JP0 CONNECTS TO CCM MODULE AND SUPPLIES RS232 COMMUNICATION FOR RX/TX MODULES.

2). JP1 THROUGH JP8 TO BE CONNECTED TO RX/TX MODULES' J2 CONNECTORS TO

PROVIDE RS232 COMMUNICATIONS.

3). JP9 CONNECTS TO CCM PORT AND PROVIDES I/O MODULES WITH RS485 COMMUNICATIONS.

4). J1 THROUGH J7 TO BE USED TO PLUG IN I/O MODULES AND SUPPLY THEM WITH +24VDC
POWER AND RS485 COMMUNICATIONS.

AB
5). TB10 TO BE USED TO INTERCONNECT TO AUXILIARY PANELS' MOTHER BOARD AND POWER
SUPPLIES TO PROVIDE RS485 COMMUNICATIONS.

1 of 2
TITLE

SHEET
REVISION
(PEGAsys)
DRAWING No.
06-235443-012
Multi-Loop I/0 Motherboard
Installation Wiring Diagram

76-100016-001
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System PEGAsys

/TX E
RXDUL
M O
E L
DU
I/O
MO

TITLE
Installation Wiring Diagram
Multi-Loop I/0 Motherboard
(PEGAsys)
DRAWING No.
06-235443-012
REVISION
AB
SHEET
2 of 2

76-100016-001 I-23 August 1999

 GRAY TO CATHODE TO NOTES
REMOTE
TO ANODE LED 1. RED AND BLACK WIIRES ARE NON-POLERIZED POWER
ORANGE
INPUTS. REFER TO RX/TX (CAT. NO. 30-402001-000)

August 1999
TO REMOVE WIRING DIAGRAM FOR CONNECTION TO SMART
BROWN CONTACT DETECTOR MULTIPLEX TRUNK CIRCUIT AND
PEGAsys

DEVICE CIRCUIT CHARACTERISTICS.

WHITE
BN 2. SUPERVISED LINE FOR REMOTE CONTACT DEVICE
EOL CONNECTION. CAUTION: CONTACT DEVICE MUST
N/O BE IN THE SAME ROOM AS ADDRESSABLE CONTACT
WH INPUT DEVICE, WITH ALL WIRING ENCLOSED IN
CONDUIT, AND A MAXIMUM LENGTH OF 150 FT.

EOL SEE NOTE 3 3. EOL RESISTOR: 820 OHM .5 WATT

(FENWAL PART NO. 06-129025-001)

PROTECTIVE 4. TO REMOTE LED (FENWAL PART NO. 70-410001-000)

COVERING OBSERVE POLARITY: ORANGE (ANODE), GRAY (CATHODE)
CAUTION: LED MUST BE IN THE SAME ROOM AS
UL LABEL ADDRESSABLE CONTACT INPUT DEVICE, WITH ALL
WIRING ENCLOSED IN CONDUIT AND A MAXIMUM LENGTH
50FT.. LED CIRCUIT IS NOT SUPERVISED.

5. MAXIMUM CURRENT REQUIREMENTS

STANDBYALARM
310uA 380uA

6. SMART DETECTOR PRODUCT NO.S 70-40XXXX-XXX AND

TYPICAL CONFIGURATIONS 71-40XXXX-XXX MAY BE MIXED ON THE SAME MULTIPLEX
TRUNK CIRCUIT, BUT SHALL NOT EXCEED 255 TOTAL
N.O. CONTACT DEVICES DEVICES PER CIRCUIT, 2040 PER SYSTEM.

MANUAL PULL STATION 7. TYPICAL PULES RATE:

NORMAL: 9 SECONDS
BK RD
ALARM: 2 SECONDS
SEE NOTE 1 TROUBLE: NO LED PULSING

I-24
EOL 8. REFER TO SYSTEM OPERATION MANUAL FOR APPLICATION
OF ADDRESSABLE CONTACT INPUT DEVICE.

9. WIRING INFORMATION SHOWN FOR 70-407002-00X THRU

70-407004-00X.
WATERFLOW

CAT. NO. DESCRIPTION

EOL -000 NORMALLY OPEN

-001 NORMALLY CLOSED

FOR SUPERVISORY USE ONLY
SEE NOTE 3

BB

1 of 1
TITLE

SHEET
REVISION
DRAWING No.
06-234563-003
NO/NC (Obsolete)
Installation Wiring Diagram
Addressable Contact Input Device

76-100016-001
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
 BROWN ( N/C )
ORANGE ( COM ) SEE NOTE 2

76-100016-001
N.C.

COM. FIELD WHITE ( N/O )

CONNECTION

N.O.
NOTES

1. RED AND BLACK WIIRES ARE NON-POLERIZED POWER

INPUTS. REFER TO RX/TX (CAT. Number 30-402001-000 &
74-200005-001) WIRING DIAGRAM FOR CONNECTION TO
SMART DETECTOR MULTIPLEX TRUNK CIRCUIT AND
CIRCUIT CHARACTERISTICS.

2. RELAY OUTPUTS ARE NOT SUPERVISED.

CAUTION: RATING: 2A, 30 VDC (RESISTIVE)
.6A, 120 VAC (RESISTIVE)

PROTECTIVE 3. MAXIMUM CURRENT REQUIREMENTS:

STANDBY: 325uA
COVERING
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System

4. SMART DETECTOR PRODUCT NO.S 70-40XXXX-XXX AND

UL LABEL 71-40XXXX-XXX MAY BE MIXED ON THE SAME MULTIPLEX
TRUNK CIRCUIT, BUT SHALL NOT EXCEED 255 TOTAL
DEVICES PER CIRCUIT, 2040 PER SYSTEM.

5. TYPICAL PULSE RATE:

RELAY RESET (STANDBY): 9 SECONDS
RELAY SET: 2 SECONDS
TROUBLE STATE: NO LED PULSING

I-25
6. REFER TO SYSTEM OPERATION MANUAL FOR APPLICATION
OF ADDRESSABLE RELAY OUTPUT

7. MOUNTS IN 4 SQUARE ELECTRICAL BOX.

LED 8. MUST BE INSTALLED IN A U.L. LISTED GANG BOX..

(SEE NOTE 5)
9. WIRING INFORMATION SHOWN FOR 70-408002-000 THRU
70-408003-000.

RD BK

SEE NOTES 1 & 9

BA

1 of 1
TITLE

SHEET
(Obsolete)

REVISION
DRAWING No.
06-234563-001
Installation Wiring Diagram
Addressable Relay Output Device

August 1999
PEGAsys
August 1999

PEGAsys
Typical N.O. Initiating
Devices

NOTES

1. Maximum 25 resistance per wire for

initiating circuit. For a total circuit wiring
See Notes: 1, 2, and 4 resistance of 50 max.
2. Terminal connection supports wiring
from #18 AWG (0.75 mm2) to #14 AWG
See Note 3 (1.5 mm2)
EOL
(+) (+) (Listed 10K Resistor) 3. Refer to Control Panel Manual for
PC Line PC Line addressable loop wiring specification.
(-) (-)
In Out
4. Maximum 10 VDC @ 1 mA.
Typical N.C. Supervisory
5. This module will not support 2-wire
See Note 3 smoke detectors.
Devices
Remote LED 6. N/O initiating device circuit is NFPA
(Optional) Class B/Style B.
I-26

7. Rating on LED circuit: 26 VDC Max. 7

See Note 7 mA Max. If not used leave terminals
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 open circuit.
(+) (-) (+) (-) A B (+) (-)
PC PC PC PC SW SW LED LED 8. All wiring is power limited and super-
vised.
ALL TERMINALS ARE POWER LIMITED
MAX. INSTALL. TEMP. 120F

DATE OF MANUFACTURE:
FOR SERVICE SEND TO:
SmartOne TM

KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.
CAT. NO. 70-407008-001

9. The AI, N/C Device is intended for use

ASHLAND, MA 01721

Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System

MODEL AI, N/O

INSTRUCTIONS

EOL
SEE INSTALLATION

06-235578-001

within the control equipment providing

400 MAIN ST.

(Listed 10K Resistor)

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 the normally closed contact.
(+) (-) (+) (-) A B (+) (-) 10. The initiating device and remote LED
1 of 1
SHEET
-
REVISION
New Design
DRAWING No.
NO/NC
Addressable Contact Input Device
Installation Wiring Diagram
TITLE

PC PC PC PC SW SW LED LED
annunciator (if used) must be located in
the same room as the AI.
AI, N/O AI, N/C
11. Use Listed 10K Ohm end-of-line resistor,
P/N 06-129025-003.
76-100016-001
76-100016-001

Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System

N/O 7
COM Field
6
Connections NOTES
N/C 5

1. AO must be installed in the same

room as the device it is controlling .
See Note 3 See Note 3 2. Terminal connection supports wiring
(+) (+) from #18 AWG (0.75 mm2) to #14
PC Line PC Line AWG (1.5 mm2)
(-) (-)
In Out 3. Refer to Control Panel Manual for
addressable loop wiring specifica-
tion.
4. PC Line wiring is power limited and
I-27

supervised.

7 6 5 4 3 2 1
N/C (+) (-) (+) (-)
N/O COM
PC PC PC PC
TERMINALS 5-7 ARE POWER LIMITED
TERMINALS 1-4 ARE POWER LIMITED
MAX. INSTALL. TEMP. 120F

DATE OF MANUFACTURE:
TM

FOR SERVICE SEND TO:

KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.
CAT. NO. 70-408004-001

ASHLAND, MA 01721
SmartOne

INSTRUCTIONS
SEE INSTALLATION
MODEL AO

06-235577-001

400 MAIN ST.

1 of 1
SHEET
-
REVISION
New Design
DRAWING No.
Addressable Relay Output Device
Installation Wiring Diagram
TITLE

PEGAsys
August 1999
PEGAsys Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System

(THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK)

August 1999 I-28 76-100016-001

Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System PEGAsys

APPENDIX J
PEGAsys NETWORK INTERFACE CARD

Note that it is not possible to download configuration informa-

J-1 INTRODUCTION tion to all the NICs on a network simultaneously. Each NIC (node)
must be configured independently.
The PEGAsys Network Interface Card (NIC) provides the capa-
bility for peer-to-peer communication between PEGAsys fire/ The operator can set network configuration options on the
suppression control panels (nodes). The NIC mounts as a PEGAsys(s) in three ways:
daughter card on the PEGAsys Central Control Module (CCM). Via the keypad on the Central Control Module.
Up to 32 nodes may be networked to form groups. Groups are
numbered logical groupings that delineate the extended cover- Via PCS.
age area and simplify programming. Via a dumb terminal.
NETWORK INTERFACE CARD Below are the network options which can be configured for each
CAT. NO. 74-200036-001
node and which are stored in that panel's memory. Paragraphs
J1 DS4 DS2 DS3 DS1
detailing each option follow.
B2NA2 B1NA1 B2IA2 B1IA1
N2 N1 I2 I1
Network Style: None, Single-Channel (Style 4),
C26
1
or Redundant Channel (Style 7).
D
TB4 TB2 TB3 TB1
U12 Node number: 0 to 32
CR3

CR2 K2 CR1 K1
K3
C27 Network group number: 0 to 32
1
R23

U13
Processing of network RESET messages:
RV11

U11
Enabled/Disabled
RV12

K4 R46
R45 C12 GND
RV6 RV8 RV2 TP1 Processing of network SILENCE messages:
RV10

+5
RV4 RV9 RV3 C20 U2
1 TP2
I1 Enabled/Disabled
C23

RV5 RV7 RV1

E1

R10 Y1
R24

TP3
E8

+ N1
Logging all events: Enabled/Disabled.
C13 TP4
N2
R25

U7 C4
R6
R5

R3
R4
E7

E3
E6

E5

E2
E4

C3
+

Time resynchronization (resynch) period

+

TP5
1 I2
TP6
R14

C5
R22 1
U3 Central Station
C2

U18 R36
R2

R20 1 1 C11 C14

U5
C18
R13
R21

R41
R40
U20
1 U4 J-2.1.1 NETWORK STYLE
1 U21 C16 1 1
U19 1
R44 R12
U14
R19
Both of the two independent data channels can be enabled (Style
C1

R17 U16 R32 C25 R29

C10
R43

R33
R15

Q4
C9 1
C8
R1
1
U17
C22
U10 U9
R34
7), or either one of the channels can be disabled (Style 4). These
Q3
R7
U15
U8 data channels transmit network information from one node to
Q1 1 1 1 1
the next, or bi-directionally if nodes are connected on either
+
R42

R26 R31 R38

Q2 C7
R28
1
U6 R18 R27 C17
C15 C24
side of the transmitting node. In Style-7 configuration, data trans-
KIDDE-FENWAL, INC. ASHLAND, MA 01721
fer is redundant so that if there is a failure on one channel, or its
cable, the other channel will maintain communication.
Figure J-1. Network Interface Card (NIC)
Each PEGAsys control panel which is a network node (i.e., J-2.1.2 NODE NUMBER ASSIGNMENT
equipped with a NIC) may be assigned to a designated network
Nodes may be assigned a number from 0 to 32. Number 0 (the
group (numbered 1 through 32) or to network group 0. When
default) means that the node does not participate in any net-
an event occurs at a node, notification of the particular alarm,
work activity. Any assignment from 1 to 32 means that the node
trouble, abort, etc., will be delivered to each of the other nodes
actively participates in all pre-configured network activity.
on the network in the form of a message.
J-2.1.3 NETWORK GROUP NUMBER ASSIGNMENT
Nodes may be assigned to groups 0 through 32. A node as-
J-2 CONFIGURATION/ADDRESSING signed to network group 0 receives and processes messages
received from all nodes only if configured to Log All Events. A
J-2.1 Overview node assigned to groups 1 through 32 will process only those
messages from nodes in the same network group unless con-
Each node can be configured independently using any of the figured to Log All (Network) groups .
three methods described in the following paragraphs. The con-
figuration process is dealt with in more detail in the PEGAsys J-2.1.4 RESET ENABLE/DISABLE
Configuration Software (PCS) Program User's Guide (76-014),
which should be referred to. Enabling RESET on a node means that it can be reset from any
other node in its group. If it is assigned to network group 0, it
can be reset from any node on the network.

76-100016-001 J-1 August 1999

PEGAsys Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System

J-2.1.5 SILENCE ENABLE/DISABLE J-2.1.8 CENTRAL STATION OPERATION

Enabling SILENCE on a node means that it can be silenced
from any other node in its group. If it is assigned to network
group 0, it can be silenced from any node on the network.
J-2.1.6 EVENT LOGGING ENABLE/DISABLE
Enabling Log All Events causes all network events to be logged
at this node. This includes the receipt of an ACKNOWLEDGE
from a button on a remote node. Disabling will result in logging
events only in its own (non-zero) group.
J-2.1.7 TIME RESYNCHRONIZATION PERIOD
(SET IN MINUTES)
A time-resynchronization message is broadcast on the network at
intervals determined by the resynch period. If a node does not
receive a resynchronization message during this interval, it uses
its network connection to ask for the time, or uses its own locally
stored time if its query does not result in a resynch message.
A node can be configured as a central station if that node is
properly connected to a Silent Knight DACT, Model 5104. Cen-
tral Station configuration automatically forces that node to Log
All Events and also MP04, a volt-free relay on the CCM, is con-
figured to activate on any alarm on any node in the network.
J-2.2 Configuring Networking Options
via the Display/Keypad
Configuration can be performed through the system menus,
accessible using a panels built-in membrane keypad and LCD
display panel. The software will initially use default values, with
networking style set to None until changed by an operator.
J-2.2 PEGAsys Panel Network Menus
The menu structure of the PEGAsys has been upgraded to
accommodate network configuration. All of the network options
listed in Paragraph J-2.1 are configurable via the front panel

3. SET

1. TIME:DATE

2. PRINTER

3. DEVICES

4. PROGRAMMING

5. DCC's

7. CLEAR EVENTS

7. NETWORK

9.CLR RMT EVENTS REMOVE QUEUED EVENTS RECIEVED FROM NODE #___

1. STYLE CH1: ENABLE/DISABLE CH2: ENABLE/DISABLE

2. NODE NUMBER NODE NUMBER ( 1 TO 64) 0: STAND ALONE

GROUP NUMBER ( 1 TO 64) 0: NOT GROUPD

3. GROUP

4. ADD/RMV NODES ADD OR REMOVE NODE#__ TO NODE# __

5. RESET EVENT ENABLE/DISABLE NETWORK RESET

6. SILENCE EVENTS ENABLE/DISABLE NETWORK SILENCE

7. LOG EVENTS LOG ALL GROUP OR ONLY NETWORK EVENTS

8. RESYNC PERIOD SET RESYNC: 0(off) OR 1-60000 MIN

9. ISOLATE 1:ISOLATE NODE 2:DE-ISOLATE NODE

Figure J-2. Network Menu

August 1999 J-2 76-100016-001

Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System PEGAsys
Table J-1. Network Configuration Table

Remote Node Location ACK SILENCE RESET LOG EVENT S/EOC/RT S

If a node is in a non-zero group, it will accept button pushes and events from remote nodes if configured as shown
below:

All nodes in group 0 L SE, L RE, L L

All nodes in same group Yes SE RE Yes

All nodes in different groups L SE, L RE, L L

If a node is in group 0, it will accept button pushes and events from remote nodes if configured as shown below:

All nodes in all groups L SE, L RE, L L

L: If node is configured to "Log All Groups."
SE: If node is configured for remote SILENCE Enable.
RE: If node is configured for remote RESET Enable

membrane keypad. In addition, the menu provides the ability to
add or remove individual or groups of nodes to/from the net-
work. The additions to the PEGAsys menu structure are dia-
gramed in Figure J-2.
J-2.3 Configuring Networking Options via PCS
Configuration of all CCM parameters, including network param-
eters, can be accomplished using PCS. The software will ini-
tially use default values, with networking Style set to None
until changed by an operator.
See the PEGAsys Configuration Software (PCS) Program User's
Guide (76-014) for details.
J-2.4 Configuring Networking Options
via a Dumb Terminal
Control panel configuration can be performed through use of
the system menus using a dumb terminal attached to the se-
rial PC Port. The software will initially use default values, with
networking style set to None until changed by an operator.
NOTE: Menus cannot be accessed with an alarm
condition in effect.
J-3 OPERATION
Networked PEGAsys panels may be configured to communi-
cate differently depending on
Whether they are assigned to network group 0 or to groups
1 through 32,
Whether they are communicating with other
panels in their local group,
Or with panels in a remote group.
Table J-1 sets forth these relationships. In more detail, how-
ever:
A node which receives the network message from another
node in the same non-zero group, will process the network
message appropriately, depending on its own installed pro-
gram. The ACKNOWLEDGE function will be automatic, the
SILENCE and RESET functions must be enabled in PE-
GAsys Configuration Software (PCS), or by using the
panels membrane keypad and LCD display panel.
A node in a different non-zero network group configured to
log all groups will process network message(s) from any
node in the entire network, depending on its own installed
program. ACKNOWLEDGE is automatic, however SI-
LENCE and RESET functions must be enabled in PEGA-
sys Configuration Software (PCS), or by using the panels
membrane keypad and LCD display panel.
A node in network group zero, the default group, will not be
recognized by any other nodes in network group zero for
functions other than receiving messages unless it is con-
figured to log all groups in PEGAsys Configuration Soft-
ware (PCS).
Refer to Table J-1 for a summary of these relationships.
Nodes can be added or deleted from network only via Net-
work Menu.
J-4 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
This section describes the hardware used to implement the
PEGAsys Network:
Central Control Module (CCM) CPU Board
Network Interface Card (NIC)
Network Wiring
J-4.1 Central Control Module CPU Board
The CCM board is a slightly modified version of the original
CPU board designed so that the NIC will plug in as a daughter
board. This modification has no effect on normal operation of
the PEGAsys panel or system.
J-4.2 Network Interface Card (NIC)
The NIC contains the hardware necessary for data-communi-
cation between network nodes. The channel is an EIA-485 bus

76-100016-001 J-3 August 1999

PEGAsys Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System

line. Each node uses one (1) NIC. The NIC performs the follow- without power will not participate in networking, this pass-through
ing functions: function allows all other network nodes to function normally while
Dual Channel Support providing the proper trouble indications.

Messaging J-4.2.5 ISOLATION

Repeater
One half of each channel is an isolated, floating RS-485 trans-
Fail Safe ceiver and the other half is a non-isolated, grounded RS-485
Isolation transceiver. This assures that the chassis of any two nodes are
physically disconnected, eliminating the possibility of ground-
loop current, while retaining the ability to detect ground faults.

J-4.3 Network Wiring

ISOLATED
NETWORK MEDIUM
Hardware
NON-ISOLATED
NETWORK MEDIUM The panels are networked by attaching two twisted, shielded-
TA1 TA2
TB1
Repeater
Logic TB2 pair cables between the appropriate NICs. The node-to-node
Rx/Tx Selection
Logic wire must not exceed a length of 4000 ft. and must be AWG 18
Rx out Rx out
Tx in Tx in or heavier gauge. Under adverse conditions (for example, high
Driver
Enable
Driver
Enable
electrical noise) shielded twisted pairs may be required. Con-
nect panels together as shown in Figure J-4.
Channel 2

Note B Channel 1
RTS Rx Tx

Note A

1/2 NETWORK INTERFACE CARD (NIC) B2NA2 B1NA1 B2IA2 B1IA1 B2NA2 B1NA1 B2IA2 B1IA1

To CCM CPU

Figure J-3. NIC Block Diagram NETWORK NETWORK

INTERFACE INTERFACE
(Shown With Power To NIC Lost) CARD CARD

J-4.2.1 DUAL CHANNEL SUPPORT

CCM CPU BOARD CCM CPU BOARD
The NIC optionally supports operation of Style-4 or Style-7 chan- PEGAsys PANEL PEGAsys PANEL

nels. Under normal operation with Style 7, network communi- Note A: Attach the shields on the 'N' side of the network line to the grounding screw on the CCM.
Note B: The shields on the 'I' side of the network line are to be cut short and left floating.
cation is divided between the two channels. In case of a short Note C: All circuits are supervised and power limited.

circuit or a break in any of the connecting wires, either channel

by itself can execute all network communications, although Figure J-4. Network Wiring
somewhat more slowly than if both channels are in operation.

J-4.2.2 MESSAGING
When a node wishes to transmit over a network channel, the J-5 MAINTENANCE AND/OR REPLACEMENT
data is written to the NIC which sends the signals out to the bus No maintenance is required. In the event of failure, the module
for receipt by remote NICs. While a node is not transmitting should be returned to the factory for repair or replacement.
data, the NIC reads the bus data traffic, and converts it to a
form readable by the nodes software. Data communication will
be configured on the NICs UART as 8 bits, no parity, 1 stop bit
(8-N-1), and 9600 baud. The NIC will either transmit locally pro-
duced data or receive and retransmit bus activity as a repeater.

J-4.2.3 REPEATER (TRANSCEIVER)

The NIC acts as a repeater, regenerating bus information as it
moves through the NIC. Its bidirectional repeater function is
implemented completely in hardware; no software is needed to
control this process. The transceivers transmit and receive
switching (in half-duplex mode) is also performed automatically
by hardware.

J-4.2.4 FAIL SAFE

If a power failure occurs in a node, the NIC includes a normally
closed (NC) relay which maintains the communications integ-
rity of the network. When the NIC loses power, the relay passes
the network signals directly through the board. While the node

August 1999 J-4 76-100016-001

Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System PEGAsys
NOTE: For proper network configuration it is necessary to use
J-6 PARTS LIST version 7.X of PCS, PEGAsys Configuration Software.
For complete information on this aspect of installation
The NIC Installation Kit (P/N 76-100036-500) consists of the see the PEGAsys Configuration Software (PCS) Pro-
following: gram Users Guide (P/N 06-235766-001). As of this
date, version 7.X of PCS is required for proper con-
Description Part Number figuration.

Network Interface Card (NIC) 74-200036-500 J-7.2 Required Tools

Snap-in Nylon Standoff, 3/4-in. 06-118142-001 Some or all of the following tools will be required to perform
removal and installation.
8-32 Theadless Brass
06-118143-001 1. Small flat-blade screwdriver.
Standoff, Nickel plated
2. 6" flat-blade screwdriver.
8-32 x 1-1/4-in. 3. No. 2 Philips screwdriver.
06-250116-030
Screw with Washer 4. Wire striper.
5. Small needle nose pliers.
Installation Sheet 06-235848-001
6. Ground strap (wrist strap) for ESD protection.
7. IC chip extraction tool.

J-7 INSTALLATION J-7.3 Central Control Module.

The NIC is installed as a daughter board to the CCM board.
After this is accomplished, the panels are wired together using
twisted, shielded-pair cable, AWG-18 or heavier. Shielded
twisted pair is recommended to reduce interference caused by
electrical noise in the vicinity of the wires.
For full Style-7 operation, two twisted pair cables must connect
each pair of panels, as shown in Figure J-4. Single-channel
operation (using only one twisted pair cable between NICs) is
possible and provides Style-4 operation. With single-channel
operation, an open circuit on any network wire will effectively
break the network into two separate peer-to-peer networks, both
functional and both reporting troubles.
J-7.1 NIC Installation
CAUTION
PEGAsys system installation applications require
that when a NIC is installed, pre-discharge and
release-state activation, as well as abort-state
activation are limited to the originating fire-alarm
control panel.
NOTE: Determine whether you have a newer or older CCM; a
new CCM can be recognized by a single-line 20 pin
header on the top edge on right side of board. If the
networking upgrade is for an older system, the new
CCM and Network Interface Card (NIC) will be sepa-
rate. First replace the old CCM with the new CCM and
then install the NIC. See following instructions for NIC
installation.
CAUTION
Many electronic components are subject to damage
from electrostatic discharge (ESD). These
components are not to be removed from their
protective wrappings until they are to be installed
in their respective equipment locations, and then
only by personnel connected to earth ground.
The PEGAsys panel will be delivered with a separate network
interface card; some existing panels can also can be retrofitted
with a network interface card. Following are instructions both
for replacement of complete CCM modules, and for installing a
NIC in an existing CCM module. The CCM module consists of
both the CPU panel and its attached LCD display and keypad
assembly.
J-7.4 Removing And Replacing A Complete CCM
Module
The old CCM module can removed as a whole and replaced
with a new module. The following provides the procedure for
removing the and replacing a complete CCM module
1. Ensure that all programming is saved using PEGAsys Con-
figuration Software (PCS). For the proper procedure, see
the PEGAsys Configuration Software (PCS) Program Users
Guide (P/N 06-235766-001).
2. Ensure that the power supply EPROM is of a version com-
patible with PEGAsys networking. See Note above.
3. Put on a properly grounded ESD-protective wrist strap.
4. Disconnect plugs from the I/O Port and Rx/Tx port, and
P.C. port. Make note of each wire and cable connection for
use during reassembly
5. Remove the remaining wiring from CCM panel.
6. Remove the six mounting screws while holding the CCM
assembly in place.
7. Remove CCM assembly from cabinet.
8. Remove new CCM assembly from packing and inspect for
physical damage. If undamaged...
9. Install new CCM in the reverse order of removal making
sure that each wire and cable is properly reconnected.
10. Reinstall programming and configure the network using
PCS. See J-2.

76-100016-001 J-5 August 1999

PEGAsys Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System

J-7.5 Installing a NIC in an existing CCM Module

J-8 POWER SUPPLY REQUIREMENTS
1. Ensure that all programming is saved using PCS software.
2. Put on a properly grounded ESD-protective wrist strap. The NIC is powered by the panel to which it is attached via the
CCM board. No other power connections are required.
3. Remove power from panel but be sure the chassis remains
grounded.
4. Remove 4 nylon screws holding membrane keypad and
remove membrane by pulling it straight out of its connec- J-9 TESTING
tor.
5. Remove the 6 threaded spacers that secure the display Testing is a function of the PEGAsys system in which the NIC is
electronics board and lift board out. Do not disconnect board installed. No local test functions exist. For more information on
- let it hang down. Data and power lines will remain con- testing the NIC and the network, see the PEGAsys Configura-
nected. tion Software (PCS) Program User's Guide.
6. Insert the three plastic standoffs that were included with
the NIC into the holes shown in Fig J-5.
7. Carefully plug the NIC into the 20-pin receptacle and onto J-10 SPECIFICATIONS
the plastic standoffs.
Input Voltage 24 VDC
8. Secure upper right corner of NIC with long screw and
spacer. Spacer will separate NIC and the CCM board and Supervisory Current 50 mA max.
screw will go through to the panel.
Alarm Current 50 mA max.
9. Replace the display electronics board and reattach the 6
threaded spacers.
10. Carefully plug in the membrane keypad and attach the 4
screws. Make sure pins and receptacle are properly aligned.
11. Attach network wiring as previously described.
12. Reinstall programming and configure the network using
PCS. See J-2.
20-PIN RECEPTACLE
FOR NIC

LONG SCREW
AND SPACER
THROUGH HERE
INSERT PLASTIC
STANDOFFS HERE

DISPLAY PORT
I/O PORT
PRINT PORT
PORT

Rx/Tx PORT
I/O

P.C. PORT
PORT
RX/TX

DISP PRINT P.C.

PORT PORT PORT

Figure J-5. CCM Board Showing

NIC Attachment Points

J-7.6 Replacing Firmware Chips

For complete instructions, see PEGAsys Firmware Upgrade
datasheet (P/N 06-235763-001). This document covers the CCM
EPROM. Be sure to follow ESD prevention procedures.

August 1999 J-6 76-100016-001

Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System PEGAsys

APPENDIX K
ADDRESSABLE SIGNAL/SOUNDER MODULE

K-1 INTRODUCTION K-3 OPERATION

The SmartOne Addressable Signal/Sounder Module (ASM) is Once installed and configured, the ASM requires little or no main-
an intelligent field device that contains its own microprocessor, tenance. The module's 24 VDC or 25/70 VAC modes can be
4K of memory, and all necessary electronics to provide standard changed from the factory defaults using switch S1 and jumper P1
notification or audio output. Connection is via the SmartOneTM com- (See Figure K-1).
patible control panels power/communication line. This compo-
nent is a UL Listed field device.
The ASM can be individually field programmed via hardware to
K-4 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
support notification appliances and NFPA Style Y (Class B) or
Style Z (Class A) operation. See Figure K-2 for audio/auxiliary The SmartOne Addressable Signal/Sounder Module (ASM) pro-
notification appliance switch and jumper selections, and NFPA vides a fully supervised remote-output circuit for connection to
operation Style Y/Z terminal selections. either 24 VDC audible/visual notification signaling devices or 25/
NOTE: The ASM is not intended to be used as a releasing device 70.7 V RMS speakers. The module provides continuous internal
and is not compatible with solenoids or squibs. supervision of:
Alarm contact position
For installation details and complete electrical and mechanical
specifications, see the ASM Installation Data Sheet (P/N 06- Connections to loop voltage and communications
235717-001). Internal power supply
Auxiliary power supply connections and status
AUXILIARY KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.
MODE ASHLAND, MA 01721 U.S.A. Memory status
P1=2&3 CAT. NO. 70-200200-001
S1=1&2 ON INSTRUCTIONS P/N 06-235717-001 The output circuit is monitored by reverse polarity and will not
A B A B PC LINE TERMINALS - POWER LIMITED actuate into a short. If the circuit has a ground fault, open, short or
PC LINE ALL OTHERS - POWER LIMITED
a relay contact failure, the device will transmit a specific trouble
TM status.
DEVICE
AUX./AUDIO MODE ADDRESS # _ _ _ _
SETTINGS
A status LED is mounted on the unit and indicates the output cir-
cuit status by a 2 second (active) or 9 second (normal) flash in-
ADDRESSABLE SIGNAL/SOUNDER MODULE (ASM)
terval. A trouble condition inhibits the status LED completely.
AUX. IN TROUBLE OUTPUT CKT.
+ - + - CKT. + - - + UL
R

AUDIO
MODE
P1=1&2 FM
S1=3 ON APPROVED K-5 MAINTENANCE OR REPLACEMENT
The ASM is shipped from the factory as an assembled compo-
Figure K-1. ASM Front Panel nent and is not field serviceable. Little or no maintenance is re-
quired.
Testing is accomplished through the testing capabilities of the
PEGAsys panel. See Chapter 5, Troubleshooting and Corrective
K-2 ADDRESSING AND REGISTRATION Maintenance, for particulars. In the event of a failure, the module
should be replaced.
As with any SmartOne loop device, addressing is through the
Kidde hand-held programmer (P/N 74-200013-001) or the PEGA- For replacement, follow the instructions in the ASM Installation
sys control panel menu/keypad as described in Chapter 2 of this Data Sheet.
manual.
Module-programmable parameters include owners-location mes-
sage, non-silenceable (waterflow), walk test, drill mode and si-
lence. The programming process is described in PEGAsys
Configuration Software (PCS) Program Users Guide, 76-014, (P/
N 06-235766-001).
Addressing and programming the module's registration into the
PEGAsys system is described in Paragraph 2-8 (and sub-para-
graphs) of this manual. Registration of the module at the PEGA-
sys panel is mandatory to ensure proper operation.

76-100016-001 K-1 August 1999

PEGAsys Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System

K-7.2 Output Circuit Characteristics

K-6 PARTS LIST
Output Circuit Rating
The following parts are required for installation and operation. All
are supplied with the ASM. 2.0 A max. @ 30.0 VDC

Addressable Signal/Sounder Module 20.0 W @ 70.7 V RMS

P/N 70-200200-001 20.0 W @ 25.0 V RMS
Front Cover Plate
Maximum Line Resistances
P/N 06235714-001
(with 12 AWG wire)
End-of-Line (EOL) Resistor, 4.7 K Ohms, 1/2 W
P/N 06-250166-452
Load Resistance Length
End-of-Line (EOL) Resistor, 47 K Ohms, 1/2 W (amps) (ohms) (feet)*
P/N 06-250166-596
Installation Data Sheet, P/N 06-235717-001 0.22 20.0 12.0k

0.55 8.0 5.0k

K-7 INSTALLATION 1.00 4.0 2.5k

Refer to Figure K-2 and to the ASM Installation Instruction Data 1.50 2.7 0.6k
Sheet.
2.00 2.0 1.2k
K-7.1 Installation Notes
* Consider total line lengths from module to field and return.
The ASM single printed circuit board is intended for indoor use
and can be mounted in a North American 4-11/16" electrical box,
or 4" square 2-1/8" deep box. The module terminal block will ac-
cept #12, #14, #16 and #18 AWG wire (4.0 mm2, 2.5 mm2, 1.5
mm2 & 1.0 mm2 respectively). Size #18 AWG being a minimum
requirement. The use of solid wire and an extension ring is rec-
ommended.
Strip 1/4" from the ends of all wires that connect to the terminal
block of the module.

1/4 (6.4mm) NTS

CAUTION
Exposing more than 1/4 of wire may cause a ground
fault. Exposing less than 1/4 of wire may result in a
faulty connection.
Refer to the National Electrical Code for proper box specifica-
tions. ASM volume is 8.94 cubic-inches.
Refer to the RX/TX specifications in the chapters on Operation,
and Functional Description for addressable-loop wiring specifica-
tions.
Power/Communication (PC) line wiring is power limited and su-
pervised. For power-limited circuits, use Type FPL, FPLR, or FPLP
cable per Article 760 of the National Electrical Code (NEC).
The note located on the module's product label (ALL OTHERS-
POWER LIMITED) must be removed if the module is connected
to a non-power limited supply source.
If the auxiliary notification appliance power source is not power
limited, the output circuit, auxiliary input circuit, and the trouble
circuit are non-power limited. Otherwise, all three circuits are
power limited.
Supervision of audio to ASM must be provided by the audio equip-
ment. Power limited or non-power limited amplifier outputs are
available.

August 1999 K-2 76-100016-001

Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System PEGAsys

APPENDIX L
REMOTE DISPLAY CONTROL MODULE
AND REMOTE DISPLAY MODULE
as the maximum quantity for each module is not exceeded. The
L-1 INTRODUCTION RDCM, in addition to emulation of the PEGAsys LEDs and LCD
displays, provides remote access to the system and, if pro-
This manual contains the information necessary to support the grammed, the PEGAsys network panel(s) and menu options
PEGAsys Remote Display Control Module (RDCM)(Figure L-1), via this emulation of the PEGAsys front panel function and nu-
P/N 76-300000-502, and Remote Display Module (RDM)(Figure meric keys.
L-2), P/N 76-300000-501. Both modules function as remote ad-
dressable adjuncts to the PEGAsys and mimic the main control Remote power is required and can be provided by the control
panels LCD and LED front displays. Additionally, the RDCM con- panel PSU or a separate supply UL listed for fire alarm applica-
tains system control switches and a tactile response numeric key- tion. In each instance, remote power is supervised by the RDCM
pad. These controls match the PEGAsys layout. The RDM does and RDM with failure displayed locally and at the control panel.
not permit operation of the control features (operation is read only). The units also contain a buzzer with sequencing that follows
The RDCM is key and password secured with the password needed the buzzer contained in the control panel.
being the one used on the associated PEGAsys panel.
Either the PEGAsys control panel or one RDCM can be pro-
grammed as the master unit to control the system under alarm
or fault conditions. Operation of an alternate (non-master) unit
will grant that module exclusive control over the system for 30
System Status Display seconds. Under these conditions, attempts to input from an-
other module will prompt a lockout display message on the mod-
AC POWER SYSTEM TROUBLE SYSTEM
ACKNOWLEDGE
SILENCE ule attempting the interrupt. This acts to prevent conflicting
ALARM

PRE-ALARM
SUPERVISORY

SILENCE
SYSTEM
RESET
SCROLL inputs. Under all circumstances, the master will be granted im-
mediate system control.
1 2 3 4 5

R 6
Figure L-1. RDCM Front Panel
System Status Display
AC POWER SYSTEM TROUBLE
7 8 9 0
L-2.1 Operator Interface
All operator interfaces are contained in the front panel assem-
bly. Operator inputs are passed to the PEGAsys for processing.
The RDCM operator-interface function keys are:
Acknowledge: Acknowledge alarms/troubles and silence
all local buzzers.
Silence: Silence signal/audibles after Acknowledge.
Reset: Reset latched alarm conditions.

ALARM SUPERVISORY Scroll: Review active alarms/troubles.

SCROLL
PRE-ALARM SILENCE
R
Figure L-2. RDM Front Panel
Module installers must be fully factory trained in all aspects of
the PEGAsys system. Additional supporting documentation is
also contained in this manual and in the PEGAsys Configura-
tion Software (PCS) Program, Users Guide 76-014, P/N 06-
235766-001.
L-2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
The RDCM and RDM communicate with the PEGAsys via an
RS-485 interface (one pair #18 AWG, twisted/shielded wire) in
a multi-drop configuration capable of supporting up to 15 RDCM
display/control and 16 RDM display only modules. The installa-
tion can be in any combination of RDCM/RDM modules so long
NOTE: Drill operation is available through the PEGAsys
menu.
The RDCM operator interface needed to enter the password
and access the PEGAsys menu is provided via the alphanu-
meric keypad:
0 - 9: Used to enter digits to access PEGAsys menus.
Delete: Used to exit menu and correct entries.
Enter: Used when selecting from PEGAsys menus.
NOTE: Operation of above keys will be hereinafter described.
The RDCM and RDM operator interface status LEDs for moni-
toring the PEGAsys and remote modules are:
Alarm: Indicates an alarm condition.
Trouble: Indicates a trouble condition.
Silence: Indicates PEGAsys signal/audibles have been
silenced after Acknowledge.
Supervisory: Indicates a supervisory condition.
Power-on: Indicates the system is receiving AC power.
Pre-alarm: Indicates a smoke or thermal detector is in pre-

76-100016-001 L-1 August 1999

PEGAsys Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System

alarm condition.
CPU fail: Mounted on main PCB and available to the in- L-3 OPERATION
staller only. Indicates RDCM/RDM processor has failed to Before proceeding with operations, please become totally fa-
initialize. miliar with PEGAsys Fire Alarm/Suppression Control System
LED colors used to represent indications are: manual, especially the sections on Active Alarm Mode, Active
Supervisory Trouble Mode, and Active Trouble Mode. Please
Red: Alarm.
note differences between latching and non-latching Active Alarm
Green: Power-on. Modes.
Yellow: CPU failure, trouble, silence, supervisory and pre-
For RX/TX loop input devices. To set either latching or non-
alarm.
latching, please refer to the PEGAsys Configuration Software
The RDM functions as read only. Therefore, it has a scroll key, (PCS) manual, PCS Operations chapter.
but does not provide the other function keys nor an operable
keypad. The following example is for latching alarm mode (for these
examples, assume the device to be manual release, address
1004).
L-2.2 Interconnection
In Normal Standby Mode, the display will show:
The RDCM and RDM operate on a shared RS-485 bus which
supports wire runs of up to 4000 ft. from the PEGAsys control SYSTEM STATUS NORMAL 10:00AM 06-08-99
panel. The primary RS-485 bus from the PEGAsys will support PEGASYS
up to 15 RDCMs and 16 RDMs in any combination not exceed-
In practice, the actual local time and date will be presented.
ing maximum of each module.
When a RX/TX loop device goes into active alarm, the display
L-2.3 Addressing will show:
Address selection is via setting of the 16-way, 4-bit hexadeci- 1004 ALARM ON - MANUAL RELEASE
mal coded rotary switch, SW1, mounted on the printed circuit Default or user text
board. See Figure L-4.
L-3.1 Switch Functions
Table L-1. Address Switch Settings
The switch functions are listed in sequence of use:
Switch RDM/RDCM Switch RDM/RDCM
Setting Address Setting Address L-3.1.1 ACKNOWLEDGE

1 RDM or RDCM 01
2 RDM or RDCM 02
3 RDM or RDCM 03
4 RDM or RDCM 04
5 RDM or RDCM 05
6 RDM or RDCM 06
7 RDM or RDCM 07
9 RDM or RDCM 09
A RDM or RDCM 10
B RDM or RDCM 11
C RDM or RDCM 12
D RDM or RDCM 13
E RDM or RDCM 14
F RDM or RDCM 15
All ALARM ON, ALARM OFF, TROUBLE ON/OFF, or SUPER-
VISORY ON/OFF messages must be acknowledged by opera-
tion of this switch. Multiple alarms must be individually
acknowledged, all other multiple inputs will default to individual
acknowledge, but may be programmed to global acknowledge
by accessing the SET" menu from the PEGAsys or any RDCM.
The RDCM will pass the acknowledge input to the PEGAsys
causing its LED to go from a pulsing to a steady mode, and the
buzzer to silence.
The PEGAsys sends a global command to silence all remote
RDCM/RDM buzzers.

8 RDM or RDCM 08
0 RDM 16 The PEGAsys sends out a global lockout command to all other
RDCMs. This gives the calling device exclusive control over the
system for 30 seconds. Under these conditions, attempts to in-
put from another module will prompt a lockout display message
(See Paragraph L-3.1.2 for example) on the module attempting
the interrupt to prevent conflicting inputs. Under all circum-

PEGAsys TWISTED SHIELDED CABLE TO CHASSIS/EARTH GROUND.

+ 1 PINS 3 & 4 ARE 5 UP TO 31

AUX. TIED TOGETHER WHEN AUX. SUPPLY
POWER SUPPLY 24V
- 2 RDCM/RDM USING THE PANELS RDCM/RDM 6 REMOTE
DEVICES (IF REQ'D.)
POWER SUPPLY
ASSEMBLY ASSEMBLY +
5 7 3 7 1 - 24V
DCM ASSEMBLY TB1
6 8 IN OUT 4 8 IN 2
PINS 6 5 3 4 TO TROUBLE
CONTACTS
TB1 PINS TB1 PINS TB1 PINS CLOSED = NORMAL
OPERATION
PIN 1 OF TB1 IS AT TOP OF CONNECTOR
76-100016-001 NOTE: ALL CIRCUITS ARE SUPERVISED AND POWER LIMITED

Figure L-3. Interconnection of PEGAsys panel, RDM, RDCM(s)

August 1999 L-2 76-100016-001

Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
stances, the module (or control panel) programmed as the sys-
tem master will be granted immediate system control.
The display at the calling device will then show:
1004 ALARM ON ACK - MANUAL RELEASE
Default or user text
(The default or user text is that entered at the associated PE-
GAsys panel. This message cannot be changed from the
RDCM.)
Then the display will show how many active alarms are still
present in the system (if any), and subsequently display how
many active trouble conditions are still present in the system (if
any). For example:
001
ACTIVE ALARMS REMAINING
Again in the case of multiple alarms (either On or Off), each
event must be acknowledged separately. In the case of mul-
tiple troubles, actuation of the acknowledge input may be sepa-
rate or programmed to global acknowledge. A maximum of 32
trouble message can be displayed/scrolled at any one time.
For non-latching sequence, each ALARM OFF will display and
must be acknowledged.
1004 ALARM OFF - MANUAL RELEASE
Default or user text
In the event of loss of communications between the RDCM and
the PEGAsys on the RS-485 bus, the local buzzer will sound
and the trouble LED will light.
L-3.1.2 SILENCE
When all alarm and trouble conditions have been acknowledged,
operation of the silence switch will have the following results:
The RDCM will pass the silence input to the PEGAsys causing
all outputs programmed for silence to de-energize.
The PEGAsys sends out a global lockout command to all other
RDCM(s). This gives the calling device exclusive control over
the system for 30 seconds. For these examples, assume RDCM
address 02. If another (non-master) module attempts an inter-
rupt, the following lockout message will display for 5 seconds:
RDCM 02
IN CONTROL
NOTE: RDCM 02 is the default. This message can be cus-
tomized in PCS. Please refer to the PEGAsys Con-
figuration Software (PCS) Program Manual
After the 30 second control period, any other module can pro-
vide system inputs (unless a module programmed as system
master assumes control).
L-3.1.3 RESET
After all active alarms and troubles have been cleared, input
devices programmed to the latching sequence will show:
XXX
ALARMS ACTIVE
Input devices programmed to the non-latching sequence will
show:
76-100016-001
PEGAsys
NO ACTIVE ALARM REMAINS
Now, operation of the reset switch will have the following re-
sults:
The RDCM will pass the reset input to the PEGAsys causing all
conditions programmed to cancel on reset to de-energize.
The PEGAsys sends out a global lockout command to all other
RDCMs. This gives the calling device exclusive control over the
system for 30 seconds and displays the following message:
SYSTEM RESET
If there are no further key entries at the calling device (address
02), and no further system events are detected, all modules
and the PEGAsys will display the system default message:
SYSTEM STATUS NORMAL 10:00AM 03-08-99
PEGASYS
In practice, the actual local time and date will be presented.
In the event of an RDCM's microprocessor going into fault con-
dition, actuation of hardware switch S3 located behind the dis-
play membrane will cause a hardware reset of the
microprocessor.
L-3.1.4 SCROLL
When the Scroll key is pressed during any active system event,
the following will result:
The PEGAsys sends out a global lockout command to all other
RDCM(s). This gives the calling device (address 02) exclusive
control over the system as described in reset above.
NOTE: The RDM scroll key does not provide the global lock-
out command.
The PEGAsys, RDCMs and RDMs will then be updated by the
next event in the buffer.
When a Scroll key is actuated at any RDCM, RDM or the PE-
GAsys, the resulting scroll display is sent globally to the sys-
tem.
LED Test Feature: With no active inputs, press and hold
the scroll key for 2 seconds. All LEDs will light for 5 sec-
onds.
System Information Entry Keys: To enter passwords and
gain access the PEGAsys menu functions, the relevant keys
are:
Numeric 0-9: Enters password and system function infor-
mation.
Enter: Enter information into the system menu.
Delete: Exit system menu and correct wrong entries.
To enter the password, press the 0 key. The RDCM opens the
password entry menu and displays:
PLEASE ENTER PASSWORD
Each key entry will then display the # character:
PLEASE ENTER PASSWORD
####
If the password entry is incorrect, the display will become:
PASSWORD ENTRY FAILED
The RDCM will request another password entry request, and, if
correct, the PEGAsys will send the 30 second global lockout
L-3 August 1999
PEGAsys Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System

command to all other RDCMs.

L-4 SPECIFICATIONS
The calling device (address 02) will then have access to the
PEGAsys menu. Please refer to this manual for menu operat-
ing instructions. ELECT RICAL

If during the password entry sequence any key other than the Input voltage 24 VDC nominal
numeric key (except Delete) is pressed before the Enter key,
the PEGAsys will update the RDCM with the default display. Supervisory current 64 mA nominal

L-3.2 LED Status Display Alarm current 85 mA nominal

The front panel display LEDs will operate in three modes: RS-485 network Up to 4000 ft from
Off: No system activity. FenwalNET control panel
On Continuously: Acknowledge alarm or trouble. using #18 AWG
twisted/shelded wire
Pulsing: 1 second on, 1 second off; active alarm or trouble.
Maximum RDCM/RDMs 15 RDCMs/16 RDMs in any
L-3.3 LCD Display combination, not exceeding
With no active events in the system, all RDCM/RDMs will dis- maximum for each module
play the default message:
Wiring style NFPA Style 4, Class "B"
SYSTEM STATUS NORMAL 10:00am 03-08-99
PEGASYS
PEGASYS is the default message. This can be customized
by PCS. Please refer to the PEGAsys Configuration Software MECHANICAL
(PCS) Program manual.
Dimensions 12.05" W X 7.156" H
L-3.4 Password Data Structure Weight 4 lbs, 13 oz
Two system levels are available from the RDCM. These are:
Level 1, User Level and Level 2, Installer Level. Please refer to
the Menu Function and Menu Structure sections of the PE-
ENVIRONMENTAL
GAsys Fire Alarm/Suppression Control System manual for de-
scriptions of the capabilities available through these levels.
Operating temperature 32oF (0oC) - 120oF (49oC)
Each PEGAsys is shipped from the factory with default pass-
words for Level 1 of 987 and Level 2 of 1865. Default pass- Operating humidity 85% non-condensing
words can be customized in the level 2 Set Menu Function.
Changing passwords for the system can be accomplished from L-5 INSTALLATION
any RDCM or directly from the PEGAsys.
See Figure L-4.
L-3.5 RDCM/RDM Local Trouble Conditions
The RDCM/RDM is supervised for failure of the power supply
and failure to communicate with the PEGAsys during the poll-
ing routine. The power failure display is:
REMOTE PSU FAULT ON
RDCM XX
If no communication is detected with the PEGAsys during the
polling routine and the PSU is active, a local trouble message
will be displayed on the RDCM/RDM.
NO COMMUNICATION WITH MAIN PANEL

August 1999 L-4 76-100016-001

Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System PEGAsys

.409

MOUNTING FOR #10

(.190 DIA.) SCREWS

12.000

5.875
9.500

SW1 ADDRESS 1 TO 16 (F)

W1 LED BACKLIGHT ENABLE

1.250
VR1 LED BACKLIGHT ADJUST

VR2 LCD CONTRAST ADJUST

1/2" & 3/4"
COMBINATION KNOCKOUTS
(2) LOCATED ON TOP SURFACE
(1) LOCATED ON EACH SIDE.

DS1
SW3
.
ND
OU
GR
RTH
EA
SIS/
AS
CH
TO
LE

D SH
IELD
ED
CAB
HARDWARE FOR
TW
ISTE
GND. CONNECTION

CONNECTOR
LY
PP
SU
R
WE FM
PO RO
VED
APP

UL
R

INSTRUCTION LABEL
.
NO
R.
SE

Figure L-4. Installation of RDM or RDCM

76-100016-001 L-5 August 1999

PEGAsys Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System

(THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK)

August 1999 L-6 76-100016-001

Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
APPENDIX M
ADDRESSABLE ALARMLINE MODULE
M-1 INTRODUCTION
The Addressable AlarmLineTM Module (AAM) permits an Alarm-
Line sensor cable to be directly interfaced to the PEGAsys control
panel. This interface will allow for pre-alarm, alarm, and trouble
conditions to be transmitted to the control panel via the RX/TX
(Receive/Transmit) loop. The AAM monitors the resistance of the
sensor cable and generates a pre-alarm (if enabled), alarm, or
overheat output (if enabled) when the resistance drops below the
programmed threshold. The module also supervises the Alarm-
Line cable for opens and shorts, which will generate a fault condi-
tion. All of the pre-alarm, alarm, overheat, and trouble conditions
will be displayed on the Central Control Module (CCM) of the
PEGAsys panel. Up to 255 AAM modules can be connected to a
single RX/TX module. Use of multiple AAMs allows flexibility in
zoning larger installations for location of alarm and zone output
control; the control panel acts as a central display and control in-
terface.
For complete information, please refer to the AlarmLine Addres-
sable Linear Heat Detector Installation, Operation and Mainte-
nance Manual (73.04).
TM
Figure M-1. Addressable AlarmLine Module Front Panel
M-2 ADDRESSING AND REGISTERING
Each AAM is shipped from the factory with the default address
of 000. This permits connection to the Power Communication
(PC) line without interfering with devices already on the loop.
Only one device with this default address should be connected
to the PC line at a time. Alternately, the AAM address can be
preset with a hand-held programmer (P/N 74-200013-001) af-
ter which the module can be connected to the PC line. If a hand-
held programmer is not available, the address can be changed
directly at the CCM using the procedure outlined in Chapter 2
of this manual.
76-100016-001
PEGAsys
M-3 OPERATION
A change in temperature produces a change in resistance be-
tween the loops within the sensor cable (as the temperature
increases, resistance decreases exponentially). This change is
continuously monitored by the AAM, which generates an alarm
or pre-alarm signal at a predetermined level corresponding to
the temperature set point.
The temperature at which the system will alarm is determined
by selecting one of 16 configuration settings using the control
panels configuration software or CCM menu options. The ap-
propriate configuration setting for a given set point is estab-
lished by the use of a nomogram incorporating two know factors:
Maximum ambient temperature of the alarm zone
Length of the sensor cable
The integrating (averaging) effect of the sensor cable allows it
to detect localized hot spot or a low level temperature increase
over the entire length. For more detailed information, please
refer to the AlarmLine Addressable Linear Heat Detector Instal-
lation, Operation and Maintenance Manual.
M-4 MAINTENANCE OR REPLACEMENT
The AAM is shipped from the factory as an assembled compo-
nent and is not field serviceable. Little or no maintenance is
required.
Refer to Chapters 4 and 5 of this manual and to the AlarmLine
Addressable Linear Heat Detector Installation, Operation and Main-
tenance Manual for further information on maintenance and test-
ing of field devices connected to the FN-2000 panel's RX/TX loop.
M-5 PARTS LIST
Refer to Section 9 of the AlarmLine Addressable Linear Heat
Detector Installation, Operation and Maintenance Manual.
M-6 INSTALLATION
Refer to Paragraph 3-2 of the AlarmLine Addressable Linear
Heat Detector Installation, Operation and Maintenance Manual.
M-7 TESTING
Refer to Section 7 of the AlarmLine Addressable Linear Heat
Detector Installation, Operation and Maintenance Manual.
M-1 August 1999
PEGAsys Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System

(THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK)

August 1999 M-2 76-100016-001

Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
APPENDIX N
NETWORKABLE CENTRAL CONTROL MODULE (NCCM)
N-1 INTRODUCTION
The Networkable Central Control Module (NCCM), shown in
Figure N-1, is the heart of the PEGAsys system and is com-
posed of two printed circuit board assemblies; the display con-
trol module (DCM), and the CCM printed circuit board. The
NCCM is available in two versions, P/N 76-100008-501 for
single-loop systems and P/N 76-100008-600 for multi-loop sys-
tems.
System Status Display
AC POWER SYSTEM TROUBLE SYSTEM
ACKNOWLEDGE
ALARM SUPERVISORY
SYSTEM
PRE-ALARM SILENCE RESET
1 2 3 4
R 6 7 8
Figure N-1. Networkable Central Control Module Front Panel
The NCCM is essentially identical to the CCM described earlier
in this manual, and has the same capabilities. However, the
CCM printed circuit board has been designed to receive the
optional Network Interface Card (See the physical description
and menu options in Appendix J of this manual), enabling net-
worked operation.
Additionally, the display control module adjunct to the main pro-
cessor module provides connection to the Remote Display Con-
trol Module (RDCM) and Remote Display Module (RDM)
described in Appendix L of this manual.
N-2 CONFIGURATION/FUNCTION
The CCM PCB controls the operation and supervision of all the
system modules and software within the PEGAsys system. It
receives loop device data from the RX/TX module, and system
data from the optional NIC and/or RDCM. It processes the data
based on pre-programmed instructions and transmits output
commands to the output modules, optional NIC and/or RDCM
or RDM modules, loop output devices, and the adjunct display
control module.
The CCM PCB contains the systems CPU, real-time clock,
watchdog timer and two serial RS-232 ports: A programming
input/output and a remote printer output port. These ports ac-
cept 6-wire RJ-12 modular connectors. PEGAsys Configura-
tion Software (PCS) is used to program the system. A multilevel
password scheme protects the system from unauthorized ac-
cess.
The real-time clock provides the NCCM with the ability to dis-
76-100016-001
PEGAsys
play the current time and date on the system LCD and provides
basic information for real-time operations.
Internal diagnostics enhance the troubleshooting ability of the
system. Examples include: microprocessor failure, memory fail-
ure, RS-232 port troubles, etc. Network diagnostics are sepa-
rately controlled and report to appropriate panels.
Two individually programmable signal output circuits (MP1 &
MP2) provided are used primarily for signaling devices (horns,
bells, strobes) and deliver up to 2.0 amps of 24 VDC power.
The MP1 output can be optionally programmed for releasing
applications using solenoid-actuated suppression equipment
(agent and sprinkler).
Two individually programmable relay outputs (MP3 & MP4) are
SILENCE
provided on the NCCM for controlling building functions during
alarm occurrences. Relays are Form C, 1 Amp @ 30 VDC rated.
SCROLL
All four NCCM outputs can be programmed via EOC to activate
5
from either panel or, if provided, network inputs.
9 0
One non-programmable trouble relay is supplied which is nor-
mally powered (24 VDC) and will transfer on any system (or, if
provided, network) trouble, supervisory, pre-alarm and complete
power-off condition. Relay is form C style, rated 1 Amp @ 30
VDC.
Refer to Appendix I, page I-2, for mechanical installation de-
tails.
An event history buffer is provided on the NCCM which will store
1024 entries for single-loop and 6100 entries for multi-loop sys-
tem events information. Network option does not alter event
limits however, network events are recorded. The system menu
permits operator retrieval of recorded events. The PCS program
provides the ability to download, store and print all or a portion
of the event history buffer.
The NCCMs common display module assembly (which is physi-
cally and electronically attached to the main processor module)
provides the system with the operator interface and, if provided,
network interface for control switches, system status LEDs, sys-
tem trouble/alarm buzzer, an 80 character (2x40) LCD display
and an integral numeric keypad. The keypad is used for enter-
ing the security password and navigating through the user
menus. The system buzzer provides two distinct signaling pat-
terns for audible warning of system alarms and troubles.
N-1 August 1999
PEGAsys Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System

(THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK)

August 1999 N-2 76-100016-001

Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System PEGAsys

APPENDIX O
CENTRAL STATION OPERATION

O-1 CENTRAL STATION OPERATION

For central station operation, the PEGAsys control panel must
be configured for central station use through PCS menu (Net-
work Settings). A Silent Knight DACT Model 5104 must be wired
to the PEGAsys control panel as shown in Figure O-1. See Model
5104 Installation Manual for information regarding connection
of the DACT to the telephone line for alarm and trouble
transmission(s).

Silent Knight DACT Model 5104 PCB

NO NC C NO NC C
Volt Free Fault Relay
Relay 2

PegaSYS CCM PCB 4.7k 18

8 17
Zone 3 Alarm
9 16
10 15
4.7k
11 14
Zone 4 Trouble
12 13

Figure O-1. Wiring for DACT

76-100016-001 O-1 August 1999

PEGAsys Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System

(THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK)

August 1999 O-2 76-100016-001

 TECHNICAL MANUAL USER FEEDBACK FORM

(Use this report to indicate deficiencies, user remarks and recommendations relating to the publication. Fold on dotted line, tape and mail to
KIDDE-FENWAL, Inc., 400 Main Street, Ashland, MA 01721, Attn. Documentation Manager or FAX to 508-881-8920)

DATE:

1. PART NUMBER 2. VOLUME NO. 3. TITLE (NOMENCLATURE)

4. CHANGE NO. OR REV. DATE 5. SYSTEM/EQUIPMENT 6. PRIORITY OF COMMENT

7. USER EVALUATION

MANUAL IS: G EXCELLENT G GOOD G FAIR G POOR G COMPLETE G INCOMPLETE

8. G PROBLEM G QUESTION G SUGGESTION G COMMENT: (check one)

9. RECOMMENDED CHANGE TO PUBLICATION

PAGE PARAGRAPH LINE FIGURE TABLE RECOMMENDED CHANGES AND REASON

NO. NO. NO. NO. NO. (Use Blank Continuation Sheets as Required)

10. ORIGINATOR 11. COMPANY NAME

12. ADDRESS

13. KIDDE-FENWAL USE ONLY

a. Received b. Action Necessity c. Priority d. Comments

220423
FOLD

Place
Stamp
Here

KIDDE-FENWAL, Inc.
400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721

Attn. Documentation Manager

FOLD

220423
 LIMITED WARRANTY STATEMENT
Kidde-Fenwal, Inc. represents that this product is free from defects in material and workmanship, and will repair or replace any
product or part thereof which proves to be defective in workmanship or material for a period of twelve (12) months from the date
of purchase but not to exceed eighteen (18) months after shipment by the manufacturer. For a full description of Kidde-
Fenwals LIMITED WARRANTY which, among other things, limits the duration of warranties of MERCHANTABILITY and FIT-
NESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE and EXCLUDES liability for CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, please read the entire
LIMITED WARRANTY on the Kidde-Fenwal Quotation, Acceptance of Order, and/or Original Invoice which will become part of
your sales agreement. Please contact Kidde-Fenwal directly for a return material authorization (RMA) number before returning
material to the factory at Ashland, Massachusetts, shipment prepaid. Kidde-Fenwal will repair or replace and ship prepaid.

Kidde-Fenwal Inc.
400 Main Street These instructions do not purport to cover all the details or variations in the equipment
described, nor do they provide for every possible contingency to be met in connection with
Ashland, MA 01721 installation, operation and maintenance. All specifications subject to change without
(508) 881-2000 notice. Should further information be desired or should particular problems arise which are

Fire Systems Fax: (508) 881-8920

not covered sufficiently for the purchasers purposes, the matter should be referred to
Kidde-Fenwal Inc., Ashland, MA.

76-100016-001 Rev. BB 1998 Kidde-Fenwal Inc. Printed in USA